SmartLEWIS™ MCU Smart Low Energy Wireless Systems with a Microcontroller Unit PMA51xx RF Transmitter ASK/FSK 315/434/868/915 MHz, Embedded 8051 Microcontroller, 10-bit ADC, 125 kHz ASK LF Receiver PMA5110 PMA5105 Version 1.0 Version 1.0 Data Sheet Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 Wireless Control Edition 2010-06-02 Published by Infineon Technologies AG 81726 Munich, Germany © 2010 Infineon Technologies AG All Rights Reserved. Legal Disclaimer The information given in this document shall in no event be regarded as a guarantee of conditions or characteristics. With respect to any examples or hints given herein, any typical values stated herein and/or any information regarding the application of the device, Infineon Technologies hereby disclaims any and all warranties and liabilities of any kind, including without limitation, warranties of non-infringement of intellectual property rights of any third party. Information For further information on technology, delivery terms and conditions and prices, please contact the nearest Infineon Technologies Office (www.infineon.com). Warnings Due to technical requirements, components may contain dangerous substances. For information on the types in question, please contact the nearest Infineon Technologies Office. Infineon Technologies components may be used in life-support devices or systems only with the express written approval of Infineon Technologies, if a failure of such components can reasonably be expected to cause the failure of that life-support device or system or to affect the safety or effectiveness of that device or system. Life support devices or systems are intended to be implanted in the human body or to support and/or maintain and sustain and/or protect human life. If they fail, it is reasonable to assume that the health of the user or other persons may be endangered. PMA51xx PMA51xx RF Transmitter ASK/FSK 315/434/868/915 MHz, Embedded 8051 Microcontroller, 10-bit ADC, 125 kHz ASK LF Receiver Revision History: 2010-06-02, Revision 2.1 Previous Revision: 2.0 Page Subjects (major changes since last revision) 101, 86 Added note to use Library function LFSensitivityCalibration() for LF Carrier Detector Threshold Level Selection. Trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG A-GOLD™, BlueMoon™, COMNEON™, CONVERGATE™, COSIC™, C166™, CROSSAVE™, CanPAK™, CIPOS™, CoolMOS™, CoolSET™, CONVERPATH™, CORECONTROL™, DAVE™, DUALFALC™, DUSLIC™, EasyPIM™, EconoBRIDGE™, EconoDUAL™, EconoPACK™, EconoPIM™, E-GOLD™, EiceDRIVER™, EUPEC™, ELIC™, EPIC™, FALC™, FCOS™, FLEXISLIC™, GEMINAX™, GOLDMOS™, HITFET™, HybridPACK™, INCA™, ISAC™, ISOFACE™, IsoPACK™, IWORX™, M-GOLD™, MIPAQ™, ModSTACK™, MUSLIC™, my-d™, NovalithIC™, OCTALFALC™, OCTAT™, OmniTune™, OmniVia™, OptiMOS™, OPTIVERSE™, ORIGA™, PROFET™, PRO-SIL™, PrimePACK™, QUADFALC™, RASIC™, ReverSave™, SatRIC™, SCEPTRE™, SCOUT™, S-GOLD™, SensoNor™, SEROCCO™, SICOFI™, SIEGET™, SINDRION™, SLIC™, SMARTi™, SmartLEWIS™, SMINT™, SOCRATES™, TEMPFET™, thinQ!™, TrueNTRY™, TriCore™, TRENCHSTOP™, VINAX™, VINETIC™, VIONTIC™, WildPass™, X-GOLD™, XMM™, X-PMU™, XPOSYS™, XWAY™. Other Trademarks AMBA™, ARM™, MULTI-ICE™, PRIMECELL™, REALVIEW™, THUMB™ of ARM Limited, UK. AUTOSAR™ is licensed by AUTOSAR development partnership. Bluetooth™ of Bluetooth SIG Inc. CAT-iq™ of DECT Forum. COLOSSUS™, FirstGPS™ of Trimble Navigation Ltd. EMV™ of EMVCo, LLC (Visa Holdings Inc.). EPCOS™ of Epcos AG. FLEXGO™ of Microsoft Corporation. FlexRay™ is licensed by FlexRay Consortium. HYPERTERMINAL™ of Hilgraeve Incorporated. IEC™ of Commission Electrotechnique Internationale. IrDA™ of Infrared Data Association Corporation. ISO™ of INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION. MATLAB™ of MathWorks, Inc. MAXIM™ of Maxim Integrated Products, Inc. MICROTEC™, NUCLEUS™ of Mentor Graphics Corporation. Mifare™ of NXP. MIPI™ of MIPI Alliance, Inc. MIPS™ of MIPS Technologies, Inc., USA. muRata™ of MURATA MANUFACTURING CO. OmniVision™ of OmniVision Technologies, Inc. Openwave™ Openwave Systems Inc. RED HAT™ Red Hat, Inc. RFMD™ RF Micro Devices, Inc. SIRIUS™ of Sirius Sattelite Radio Inc. SOLARIS™ of Sun Microsystems, Inc. SPANSION™ of Spansion LLC Ltd. Symbian™ of Symbian Software Limited. TAIYO YUDEN™ of Taiyo Yuden Co. TEAKLITE™ of CEVA, Inc. TEKTRONIX™ of Tektronix Inc. TOKO™ of TOKO KABUSHIKI KAISHA TA. UNIX™ of X/Open Company Limited. VERILOG™, PALLADIUM™ of Cadence Design Systems, Inc. VLYNQ™ of Texas Instruments Incorporated. VXWORKS™, WIND RIVER™ of WIND RIVER SYSTEMS, INC. ZETEX™ of Diodes Zetex Limited. Last Trademarks Update 2009-10-19 Data Sheet 3 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PMAx1xx Product Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 13 14 14 14 16 17 28 2 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.2.1 2.1.2.2 2.1.2.3 2.1.2.4 2.1.2.5 2.1.2.6 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.1.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.3 2.3.1 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.2.1 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.2.1 2.6.2.2 2.6.2.3 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Modes and States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INIT state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RUN state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POWER DOWN state (PDWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status of PMA5110 Blocks in Different States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wake-up Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interval Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Configuration Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watchdog Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vmin Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brownout Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH Memory Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADC Measurement Overflow and Underflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Clock Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 kHz RC LP Oscillator (Low Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 MHz RC HF Oscillator (High Frequency) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crystal Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 29 29 32 32 32 32 33 33 34 35 35 37 42 43 45 45 50 50 50 50 51 51 51 52 52 52 53 53 54 57 58 58 58 58 59 Data Sheet 4 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Table of Contents 2.6.3 RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 2.6.4 Code Memory mapped SFRs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 2.6.4.1 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 2.6.5 Battery buffered data RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 2.6.6 Special Function Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 2.7 Microcontroller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 2.7.1 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 2.8 Interrupt Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 2.8.1 External Interrupts 0 and 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 2.8.2 Timer Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 2.8.3 I2C Interface Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 2.8.4 SPI Interface Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 2.8.5 LF Receiver Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 2.8.6 RF Encoder Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 2.8.7 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 2.9 RF Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 2.9.1 Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 2.9.2 Voltage-Controlled Oscillator (VCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 2.9.3 Power Amplifier (PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 2.9.4 ASK Modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 2.9.5 Manchester/BiPhase Encoder with Bit Rate Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 2.9.6 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 2.10 LF Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 2.10.1 LF Receiver Analog Front End Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 2.10.1.1 Attenuator (AGC) and Data Filter / Data Slicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 2.10.1.2 LF Carrier Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 2.10.1.2.1 Carrier Detector Threshold Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 2.10.1.2.2 Carrier Detector Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 2.10.2 LF Receiver On/Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 2.10.2.1 LF Receiver On/Off Timer Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 2.10.3 LF Receiver Baseband Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 2.10.3.1 Synchronizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 2.10.3.2 Bit rate Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 2.10.3.3 LF Data Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 2.10.3.4 Wake-up Pattern Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 2.10.3.5 LF Receiver Data Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 2.10.3.5.1 8 bit data byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 2.10.3.5.2 Serial bit stream data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 2.10.3.5.3 RAW data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 2.10.3.5.4 RAW Carrier Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 2.10.4 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 2.11 Sensor Interfaces and Data Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 2.11.1 Sensor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 2.11.1.1 Two Differential Highly Sensitive Interfaces to External Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 2.11.1.2 Interface to Other Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 2.11.1.3 Reference Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 2.11.2 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 2.11.3 Battery Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 2.11.4 Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 2.11.4.1 ADC Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 2.11.4.1.1 Clock Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Data Sheet 5 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Table of Contents 2.11.4.1.2 Sample Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.4.1.3 Conversion Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.4.2 ADC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.4.2.1 Reference- and Signal Voltage Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.4.2.2 Single ended / Differential Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.4.2.3 Comparator Signal Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.4.2.4 Channel Gain Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.4.2.5 Full Conversion or Sub Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.4.2.6 Analog Offset Correction of the Wheatstone Bridge Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.4.3 ADC Conversion Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.5 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 16 bit CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) Generator/Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12.1 Byte-aligned CRC Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12.2 Byte-aligned CRC Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12.3 Serial bit stream CRC Generation/Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12.4 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 8 bit Pseudo Random Number Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13.1 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14 Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.1 Timer 0 and Timer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.1.1 Basic Timer Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.1.2 Timer Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.1.2.1 Timer/Counter 0/1 - Mode 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.1.2.2 Timer/Counter 0/1 - Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.1.2.3 Timer/Counter 0/1 - Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.1.2.4 Timer/Counter 0/1 - Mode 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.1.3 Timer/Counter 0/1 Interrupt support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.1.4 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.2 Timer 2 and Timer 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.2.1 Basic Timer Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.2.2 Timer Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.2.2.1 Timer 2/3 - Mode 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.2.2.2 Timer 2/3 - Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.2.2.3 Timer 2/3 - Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.2.2.4 Timer 2/3 - Mode 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.2.2.5 Timer 2/3 - Mode 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.2.2.6 Timer 2/3 - Mode 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.2.2.7 Timer 2/3 - Mode 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.2.2.8 Timer 2/3 - Mode 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.2.3 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15 General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15.1 GPIO Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15.2 Spike Suppression on Input Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15.3 External Wake-up on PP1-PP4 and PP6-PP9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15.4 Alternative Port Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15.5 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.16 I C Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16.1 Module Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16.2 I2C Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16.2.1 Slave Mode Sequence (Polling Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16.2.2 Slave Mode Sequence (Interrupt Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sheet 6 113 113 114 114 114 114 114 114 114 115 116 123 123 124 124 125 128 128 129 129 129 129 129 130 130 130 131 131 136 136 136 136 137 138 138 139 140 140 141 142 147 147 147 147 148 150 156 156 157 157 157 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Table of Contents 2.16.2.3 General Call Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16.2.4 Master Mode Sequence (Polling Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16.2.5 Master Mode Sequence (Interrupt Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16.3 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17 SPI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17.1 SPI Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17.1.1 Full-Duplex Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17.1.2 Half-Duplex Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17.1.3 Data Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17.2 Module Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17.3 Interrupt Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17.4 SPI Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17.4.1 Slave Mode Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17.4.2 Master Mode Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17.5 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18 PROGRAMMING Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18.1 FLASH Write Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18.2 FLASH Read Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18.3 FLASH Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18.4 FLASH Check Erase Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18.5 FLASH Set Code Lock (Lockbyte 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18.6 FLASH Set User Data Sector Lock (Lockbyte 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18.7 Read Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19 DEBUG Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19.1 ROM Debug Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19.2 DEBUG Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19.2.1 Set SFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19.2.2 Read SFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19.2.3 Set IData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19.2.4 Read IData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19.2.5 Set XData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19.2.6 Read XData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19.2.7 Set PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19.2.8 Read PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19.2.9 Single Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19.2.10 Run Interruptible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19.2.11 Run until Breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 158 158 160 165 165 166 167 168 169 169 170 170 170 170 177 177 178 178 179 179 180 180 181 181 181 181 182 182 182 182 183 183 183 183 183 184 3 Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3 Product Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3.1 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3.2 Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3.3 Supply Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3.4 RF-Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3.5 LF Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3.6 Crystal oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3.6.1 Crystal oscillator recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3.7 12 MHz RC HF oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3.8 2 kHz RC LP oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 185 185 186 186 186 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 192 Data Sheet 7 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Table of Contents 3.1.3.9 3.1.3.10 3.1.3.11 3.1.3.12 3.1.3.13 3.1.3.14 3.1.3.15 3.1.4 4 Interval Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power On Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMIN Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6k FLASH Code memory data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 times 128 byte FLASH Data memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital I/O Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matching Network for the Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 193 194 194 194 195 195 196 Register Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 5 Package Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Data Sheet 8 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx List of Figures List of Figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Data Sheet Pin-outs of PMA51xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 PMA51xx Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Operating Mode Selection of the PMA51xx after Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 NORMAL mode - State Transition Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Power On Reset - Operating Mode Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Block Diagram of the System Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Interval Timer Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Calculation of Interval Timer period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 PMA5110 Clock Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Formulas for Crystal selection dependent of RF Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Crystal Oscillator and FSK-Modulator Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Memory Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Naming Convention for Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 RF Transmitter Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Manchester/BiPhase Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Diagram of the Different RF Encoder Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Calculation of RF bit rate timer value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 LF Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 LF Receiver AFE Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 LF Receiver AFE Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 LF Receiver Carrier Detector Hold Time Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Carrier Detector Threshold Calibration Timing (with “freeze”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 LF Receiver Carrier Detector Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Calculation of time base for LF Receiver On/Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Calculation of On time for LF Receiver On/Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Calculation of Off time for LF Receiver On/Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 LF Receiver Baseband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 LF Receiver Baseband Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Calculation of LF Receiver bit rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 LF Receiver Data Decoder schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Block Diagram of the Sensor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Wheatstone Bridge Sensor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 External Sensor Use Channel 2 as Reference Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 ADC Timing diagram (standard conversion). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 ADC frequency calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 ADC sample time delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Generation of ADC clock and the sample time signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Calculation of the ADC conversion time using full conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Calculation of the ADC conversion time using sub conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ADC offset voltage calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Calculation of single ended conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Calculation of differential conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) Generator/Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) Generator/Checker example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Example of Serial CRC Generation/checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Timer/Counter 0, Mode 0, 13-Bit Timer/Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Timer/Counter 0, Mode 2: 8-bit Timer/Counter with auto-reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Timer/Counter 0, Mode 3: Two 8-bit Timers/Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Timer 2/3 - Mode 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 9 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx List of Figures Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Data Sheet Timer 2/3 - Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer 2/3 - Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer 2/3 - Mode 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer 2/3 - Mode 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer 2/3 - Mode 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer 2/3 - Mode 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer 2/3 - Mode 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical description of external wake-ups and internal pull-up/pull-down resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . I2C module structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation of I2C baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPI principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full-Duplex configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Half-Duplex Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPI data modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPI module structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation of SPI baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend for I2C-Commands in PROGRAMMING mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH Write Line command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH Read Line command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH Erase command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH Erase: Sector byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH Check Erase Status command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH Check Erase Status: Sector byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH Check Erase Status: Status byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH Set Lockbyte 3 command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Status command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Status: Status byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend for I2C communication in DEBUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set SFR command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read SFR command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set IData command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read IData command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set XData command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read XData command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set PC command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read PC command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run Interruptible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run until Breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matching network for the power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Package Outline PG-TSSOP-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 137 138 139 139 140 141 141 148 156 160 165 166 167 168 169 171 177 178 178 178 178 179 179 179 180 180 180 181 181 182 182 182 182 183 183 183 183 183 184 196 201 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx List of Tables List of Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Data Sheet PMA51xx and PMA71xx Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Abbreviations for Pin Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Pin Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Operating Mode Selection after Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 State Transitions in NORMAL mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Status of Important PMA5110 Blocks in Different States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Special Function Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Interrupt Vector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Selection of the Gain Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 GPIO Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 I/O Port 1 - Alternative Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Registers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 FLASH Erase: Sector byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 FLASH Check Erase Status: Sector byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 FLASH Check Erase Status: Status byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Read Status: Status byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Temperature Sensor Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Battery Sensor Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Supply Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 RF Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 LF Receiver, VBat = 2.1-3.6V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Crystal oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 NDK crystal oscillator recommendation for PMA51xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 12 MHz RC HF oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 2 kHz RC LP oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Interval Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Power On Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 VMIN Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 6k FLASH Code memory data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 2 times 128 byte FLASH Data memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 ADC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Digital I/O Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 11 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx List of Tables Table 50 Table 51 Data Sheet Values of the matching network for the power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Register Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 12 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description 1 Product Description 1.1 Overview The SmartLEWIS™ MCU family comprises an ASK/FSK multiband transmitter for the sub 1GHz ISM frequency bands with an embedded 8051 microcontroller as base functionality. Additionally, the highly integrated single chip family has internal sensors and optional peripheral functions like an analog to digital converter (ADC) and a LF Receiver on chip. The operating voltage range of 1.9 to 3.6 V, the high efficiency Power Amplifier and an advanced power control system make the PMA51xx family ideal for battery operated applications where low current consumption is necessary. The pin-compatible product family requires only a few external components and is the basis for flexible wireless control transmitter platforms enabling applications for different frequency bands, output power levels and feature sets based on only one design - just through different mounting options. The multiband ASK/FSK transmitter for 315/434/868/915 MHz frequency bands contains a fully integrated VCO, a PLL synthesizer, an ASK/FSK modulator and a high efficiency Power Amplifier with selectable output power. Fine tuning of the center frequency can be done by an on-chip capacitor bank. The integrated microcontroller is instruction set compatible to the standard 8051 processor. It can be clocked with an internal 12 MHz RC HF or an external oscillator. 6 clock cycles are needed for the execution of one instruction. This results in 2 MIPS1) when using the 12 MHz RC HF oscillator. The microcontroller is equipped with various peripherals like a hardware Manchester/BiPhase Encoder/Decoder and a CRC Generator/Checker. To store the microcontroller application program code, a 6 kbyte on-chip FLASH memory is integrated. This FLASH memory is also used for saving the unique ID-number of the chip. A comprehensive software function library with high level commands in ROM allows easy and fast time to market development. The library provides many powerful functions like AES-encryption and EEPROM emulation, what helps to reduce the user code size. Additional peripherals are an integrated temperature sensor and a low battery voltage sensor. Measurements via these internal sensors and reading signals from analog inputs (e.g. from an external analog sensor) are performed under software control. Depending on the product variant, PMA51xx offers an embedded multi-channel 10-bit analog to digital converter with flexible high-gain settings as interface for a broad variety of analog sensors and an integrated 125 kHz LF Receiver. The LF Receiver enables wireless wake-up in battery operated applications with ultra-longlifetime or even contactless configuration of the device. 1) MIPS .. Million Instructions Per Second Data Sheet 13 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description 1.2 PMAx1xx Product Family The PMAx1xx product family contains various product variants listed in Table 1 “PMA51xx and PMA71xx Family” on Page 14. Note: This data sheet documents the full feature set of the PMA5110, which has the full feature set of the PMA51xx product family available. When using the PMA51xx family data sheet for product variants other than the PMA5110, please keep in mind that not all of the features and data described are relevant for these other members of the family. Following table shows the functional differences of the PMA51xx and PMA71xx family members: Table 1 PMA51xx and PMA71xx Family Product Name Ordering Code RF Transmitter Embedded 8051 MCU PMA7110 SP000430596 X X PMA7107 SP000450412 X X PMA7106 SP000450410 X X PMA7105 SP000450408 X X PMA5110 SP000373573 X X PMA5105 SP000463432 X X ADC X 125 kHz LF Receiver Automotive Qualified X no X no X no no X X yes yes The PMA51xx products are supporting a temperature range from -40 to +125°C and are full automotive qualified, tailored for automotive applications and industrial applications in harsh environment. Additionally, Infineon offers the PMA71xx product family with a temperature range of -40 to +85°C, tailored for consumer and industrial applications. 1.3 • • • • Applications Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Security and alarm systems requiring high quality standards Industrial controls in harsh environments Wireless sensing 1.4 Key Features General: • • • • • Supply voltage range from 1.9 V up to 3.6 V Operating temperature range from -40 to +125°C Low power down current consumption < 0.6 µA Advanced power control system for lowest system current consumption, switching the microcontroller or transmitter part into POWER DOWN or IDLE state whenever possible PG-TSSOP-38 package Transmitter: • • • • Multiband RF Transmitter for ISM frequency band 315/434/868/915 MHz SW configurable transmit power of 5/8/10 dBm into 50 Ohm load Selectable transmit data rates up to 32 kbit/s (64 kchips/s) for the temperature range -40°C to +85°C and 20 kbit/s (40 kchips/s) for temperatures above +85°C RF Encoder supporting Manchester-, BiPhase- or NRZ coded data (Chip Mode) Data Sheet 14 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description • • • • ASK/FSK modulation capability FSK frequency deviation up to 100 kHz Fully integrated VCO and PLL synthesizer Crystal oscillator tuning on chip Microcontroller: • • • • • • • • 8051 instruction set compatible microcontroller (cycle-optimized) 6 kbyte free programmable FLASH code memory 2 blocks of 128 byte FLASH data memory, alternatively usable as 31 byte emulated EEPROM ROM embedded software function library with preprogrammed functions and high level commands for easy programming 128 bit AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) embedded as software function 256 bytes RAM (128 bytes configurable to keep content in POWER DOWN state) 16 bytes XData memory (supplied in POWER DOWN state) 2 MIPS when using internal 12 MHz RC HF oscillator Peripherals: • • • • • • • • • • • • 125 kHz ASK LF Receiver LF Receiver data rate for typical 3.9 kbit/s (Manchester/BiPhase coded) 10 bit ADC with 3 pair differential channels and flexible high-gain settings (e.g. as inputs for external sensors) 10 free programmable bidirectional General Purpose Input Output pins (GPIO) with on-chip pull-up/pull-down resistors. 8 of them have wake-up functionality On-chip temperature sensor On-chip voltage sensor for low battery voltage measurement Brownout Detector Manchester/BiPhase Encoder and Decoder 16 bit hardware CRC Generator 8 bit Pseudo Random Number Generator I2C bus interface SPI bus interface Miscellaneous: • • • • • Watchdog Timer 4 independent 16 bit timers Wake-up from POWER DOWN state possible by different sources: Interval Timer, Watchdog Timer, LF Receiver or external wake-up sources connected to GPIOs On-chip debugging via I2C interface 48 bit unique-ID on chip Data Sheet 15 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description 1.5 Pin Diagram Pins not used for PMA5105 VDD (sens) 1 38 V2N (sens) V1N (sens) 2 37 VM2 (sens) VM1 (sens) 3 36 V2P (sens) V1P (sens) 4 35 RD (sens) GNDB 5 34 GNDC GNDA 6 33 VDDA VBat 7 32 VDDD PGND 8 31 VReg PA 9 30 LF GND 10 29 xLF PP2/TxDataOut/WU1/T3Count 11 28 AMUX2 PP1/I2C_SDA/WU0/T0Count/OPMode2 12 27 AMUX1 PP0/I2C_SCL/T0Gate/OPMode1 13 26 XGND PP3/SPI_CS/WU2 14 25 XTAL PP4/SPI_MISO/WU3 15 24 XTALCAP PP5/SPI_MOSI 16 23 TME PP6/SPI_Clk/WU4 17 22 MSE xReset 18 21 PP9/Ext_Int0/WU7/T1Count PP7/Ext_Int1/WU5 19 20 PP8/WU6/T1Gate Figure 1 Data Sheet PMA5110 Pin-outs of PMA51xx 16 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description 1.6 Pin Description Abbreviations Standard abbreviations for I/O are shown in Table 2. Table 2 Abbreviations for Pin Type Abbreviations Description I Standard input-only pin. Digital levels. I/O I/O is a bidirectional input/output signal. AI Input. Analog levels. AO Output. Analog levels. AI/O Input or Output. Analog levels. PWR Power GND Ground Table 3 Pin Description Pin No. Name Pin Type Buffer Type Function 1 VDD_sens AO Supply_output Sensor Bridge Positive Supply Output of VReg during measurement. VBat Voltage Regulator GNDA VReg GNDA VDD (sens) Switch GNDA 2 V1N_sens AI Analog Channel 6, High-gain ADC Input Negative input connect to sensor bridge. Output of wheatstone bridge sensor VDDA V1N 500 2k GNDA Data Sheet 17 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description Table 3 Pin Description (cont’d) Pin No. Name Pin Type Buffer Type Function 3 VM1_sens GND Supply Channel 6, High-gain ADC Input Sensor bridge negative supply. Same voltage as chip GND. VDDA VM1 GNDA 4 V1P_sens AI Analog Channel 6, High-gain ADC Input Positive input connect to sensor bridge. Output of wheatstone bridge sensor VDDA V1P 500 2k GNDA 5 GNDB GND Supply Ground PGND GNDB XGND 6 GNDA GND Supply Ground PGND GNDA XGND Data Sheet 18 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description Table 3 Pin Description (cont’d) Pin No. Name Pin Type Buffer Type Function 7 VBat PWR Supply Battery Supply Voltage Regulators VBat Vo lta g e R e g u la to r VReg 8 PGND GND Supply Power Amplifier Ground Double bond PGND GND XGND 9 PA AO Analog Power Amplifier Output Stage 10 PA PGN D 10 GND GND Supply(Analog) GND Data Sheet PGN D Ground 100 19 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description Table 3 Pin Description (cont’d) Pin No. Name Pin Type Buffer Type Function 11 PP2/TxDataOut/ WU1/T3Count/ I/O Digital PP2 -) Serial output of Manchester / Biphase encoded data. -) GPIO -) External wake-up source 1 -) Clock source for Timer 3 -) Internal, switchable pull-up/pulldown. Combinatonal Logic 250k VBat Pullup Pulldown Tristate Data Tristate Combinatonal Logic VBat PPS2 GND VBat PP2 Data 500 PPO2 PPD 2 Serial output of RF Encoder GND PPI2 T3Count I/O Digital VBat 50k VBat Pullup Pulldown Tristate Combinatonal Logic PP1/I2C_SDA/ WU0/T0Count/ OPMode2 Data Tristate Combinatonal Logic 12 PPS1 GND VBat Data PP1 500 PP1 -) I2C bus interface data -) GPIO -) External wake-up source 0 -) Clock source for Timer 0 -) Select operation mode -) Internal, switchable pull-up/pulldown. PPO1 PPD 1 I2CD I2CEn GND PPI1 13 PP0/I2C_SCL/ I/O T0Gate/OPMode1 Digital Combinatonal Logic 50k VBat Pullup Pulldown Tristate Data Tristate Combinatonal Logic VBat PPS0 GND PP0 -) I2C bus interface clock -) GPIO -) External enable for Timer 0 -) Select operation mode -) Internal, switchable pull-up/pulldown. VBat PP0 Data 500 PPO0 PPD 0 I2C_SCL I2CEn GND PPI0 Data Sheet 20 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description Table 3 Pin Description (cont’d) Pin No. Name Pin Type 14 PP3/SPI_CS/WU2 I/O Buffer Type Function Digital PP3 -) SPI bus interface chip select -) GPIO -) External wake-up source 2 -) Internal, switchable pull-up/pulldown. Combinatonal Logic 250k VBat Pullup Pulldown Tristate Data Tristate Combinatonal Logic VBat PPS3 GND VBat Data PP3 PPO3 PPD 3 SPIEn 500 GND PPI3 SPI_CS 15 PP4/SPI_MISO/ WU3 I/O Digital Combinatonal Logic 250k VBat Pullup Pulldown Tristate Data Tristate Combinatonal Logic VBat PPS4 GND PP4 -) SPI bus interface master in slave out -) GPIO -) External wake-up source 3 -) Internal, switchable pull-up/pulldown. VBat PP4 Data 500 PPO4 PPD 4 SPI_MISO SPIEn GND PPI4 16 PP5/SPI_MOSI I/O Digital Combinatonal Logic 250k VBat Pullup Pulldown Tristate Data Tristate Combinatonal Logic VBat PPS5 PP5 -) SPI bus interface master out slave in -) GPIO -) Internal, switchable pull-up/pulldown. GND VBat PP5 Data 500 PPO5 PPD 5 SPI_MOSI SPIEn GND PPI5 Data Sheet 21 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description Table 3 Pin Description (cont’d) Pin No. Name Pin Type 17 PP6/SPI_Clk/WU4 I/O Buffer Type Function Digital PP6 -) SPI bus interface clock -) GPIO -) External wake-up source 4 -) Internal, switchable pull-up/pulldown. Data Tristate Logic Combinatonal 250k Pullup Pulldown Tristate Combinatonal VBat PPS 6 GND VBat VBat Data PPO 6 Logic PP6 500 PPD 6 SPI _Clk SPIEn GND PPI 6 18 xReset I Digital External Reset Low active VBat 50k 5 00 R e se t xReset 19 PP7/Ext_Int1/WU5 I/O Digital Combinatonal Logic 250k VBat Pullup Pulldown Tristate Data Tristate Combinatonal Logic VBat PPS7 PP7 -) GPIO -) External interrupt source 1 -) External wake-up source 5 -) Internal, switchable pull-up/pulldown. GND VBat PP7 Data PPO7 PPD 7 500 GND PPI7 Data Sheet 22 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description Table 3 Pin Description (cont’d) Pin No. Name Pin Type 20 PP8/WU6/T1Gate I/O Buffer Type Function Digital PP8 -) GPIO -) External wake-up source 6 -) External enable for Timer 1 -) Internal, switchable pull-up/pulldown. Combinatonal Logic 250k VBat Pullup Pulldown Tristate Data Tristate Combinatonal Logic VBat PPS8 GND VBat Data PP8 PPO8 PPD 8 500 GND PPI8 21 PP9/Ext_Int0/WU7 I/O /T1Count Digital Combinatonal Logic 250k VBat Pullup Pulldown Tristate Data Tristate Combinatonal Logic VBat PPS9 GND PP9 -) GPIO -) External interrupt source 0 -) External wake-up source 7 -) Clock source for Timer 1 -) Internal, switchable pull-up/pulldown. VBat PP9 Data PPO9 PPD 9 500 GND PPI9 22 MSE I Digital Mode Select Enable High active, set to GND in NORMAL Mode. VBat 500 MSE MSE_i 250k Data Sheet 23 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description Table 3 Pin Description (cont’d) Pin No. Name Pin Type Buffer Type Function 23 TME I Digital Test Mode Enable, n.a. for Normal Application Has to be set to GND in NORMAL Mode VBat TME_i 500 TME 250k 24 XTALCAP AI Analog Crystal Oscillator Load Capacitance 10 XTALCAP XGN D 25 XTAL AI XGN D Analog Crystal Oscillator Input VD D D XTAL ≈ 0 .9 Vd c 500 XGN D Byp a ss XGN D 26 XGND GND Supply Crystal Oscillator Ground PGND GND XGND Data Sheet 24 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description Table 3 Pin Description (cont’d) Pin No. Name Pin Type Buffer Type Function 27 AMUX1 AI Analog Additional Differential ADC Standard Input1 for External Sensor Connect to GND if not use. VDDA 500 AMUX1 GND 28 AMUX2 AI ADC Channel 2 Input 1 GND Analog Additional Differential ADC Standard Input2 for External Sensor Connect to GND if not use. VDDA 500 AMUX2 GND 29 xLF AI ADC Channel 2 Input 2 GND Analog Differential LF Receiver Input2 125kHz Input. xLF 50 15k xLF_i GND 30 LF AI Analog Differential LF Receiver Input1 LF 50 15k LF_i GND 31 VReg AO Supply VBat Vo lta g e R e g u la to r VReg Internal Voltage Regulator Output Connect to decoupling capacitor (CBCAP=100 nF) Regulated Power supply. GN D GN D Data Sheet 25 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description Table 3 Pin Description (cont’d) Pin No. Name Pin Type Buffer Type Function 32 VDDD PWR Supply Digital Supply VDDD 1.6 ...2.5V Digital core GND 33 VDDA PWR Supply Analog Supply VDDA An a lo g co re GN D 34 GNDC GND Supply Ground PGND GNDC XGND 35 RD_sens AI Analog Diagnostic Resistor Use only by having diagnostic resistor on sensor bridge for highgain ADC input, otherwise no connection VD D A 500 RD 2k 100k 36 V2P_sens AI Analog Channel 7, High-gain ADC Input Positive input connect to sensor bridge. Output of Wheatstone bridge sensor. VD D A V2P Data Sheet 500 26 2k Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description Table 3 Pin Description (cont’d) Pin No. Name Pin Type Buffer Type Function 37 VM2_sens GND Supply Channel 7, High-gain ADC Input Sensor bridge negative supply. Same voltage as chip GND. VD D A 500 V2P 38 V2N_sens AI 2k Analog Channel 7, High-gain ADC Input Negative input connect to sensor bridge. Output of Wheatstone bridge sensor. VDD A V2N Data Sheet 500 27 2k Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Product Description Functional Block Diagram 12MHz RC HF Oscillator V1N 6 kB Flash 12 kB ROM PP0 General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO, I2C, SPI, WU…) PP1 PP2 PP9 ADC V2N Diff. standard input AMUX1 AMUX2 RF Transmitter Manchester/BiPhase Coder Input Multiplexer Diff. high sensitive input 2 V2P 256 B RAM ... Diff. high sensitive input 1 V1P ... 1.7 8051 Microcontroller Reference Voltage & Offset DAC Interrupt Controller Bridge Supply ADC State Machine VDD(sens) R ADC T RF-PLL PGND XTAL Crystal Oscillator ASK Modulator XTALCAP FSK Modulator XGND LF Receiver Wake Up Power Mgm Reset Clock Controller Interval Timer Timer Calibration Internal Reference Voltage Internal Temperature Sensor System Controller PA Power Amplifier Digital Receiver Carrier Detector LF 125kHz Receiver xLF TME MSE Vmin Detector xReset Voltage Regulators Low Power V-reg Low Dropout V-reg PRNG1) Brownout Detector 2kHz RC LP Oscillator Special Function Registers CRC Generator Watch dog Timer Timer GND VDDA VDDD VBat VReg 1) PRNG .. Pseudo Random Number Generator Figure 2 Data Sheet PMA51xx Block Diagram 28 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2 Functional Description 2.1 Operating Modes and States The PMA51xx can be operated in three different operating modes. • • • NORMAL mode PROGRAMMING mode DEBUG mode 2.1.1 Operating Mode Selection SYSTEM RESET * POR, xReset Software reset Brown-out event MSE = 0 or MSE = 1 TME = 0 TME = 1 don’t use Mode Select TEST Mode MSE = 1 PP0=0 PP1=1 Lockbyte 2 not set PROGRAMMING Mode MSE = 1 PP0=0 PP1=0 MSE = 1 PP0=1 PP1=0 Lockbyte 2 not set don’t use TEST Mode DEBUG Mode PP0 PP1 1 1 or 1 0 or 0 1 or Lockbyte 2 set or MSE = 1 PP0=1 PP1=1 Lockbyte 2 not set NORMAL Mode *Note: Whenever TME is set to high the current operation mode is left and T EST Mode is entered , regardless if there was a reset event or not ! Figure 3 Operating Mode Selection of the PMA51xx after Reset The Mode Select is entered after the System Reset expires. The levels on the I/O pins PP0 and PP1 are latched by the System Controller and read by the operating system to determine the mode of operation of the device according to Table 4 “Operating Mode Selection after Reset” on Page 30. Figure 3 “Operating Mode Selection of the PMA51xx after Reset” on Page 29 shows how the MSE and Lockbyte 2 are also checked to determine the operating mode. The MSE, PP0, and PP1 levels must not change after reset release during the whole tMODE period (see Figure 5 “Power On Reset - Operating Mode Selection” on Page 31). Data Sheet 29 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Table 4 Operating Mode Selection after Reset TME MSE Lockbyte 2 PP0 PP1 Operating Mode Device Control Hardware Restrictions 0 0 x x x NORMAL FLASH write access depends on Lockbyte setting 0 1 x 0 0 TEST1) 0 1 Not set 0 1 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING mode handler None 0 1 Set 0 1 NORMAL CPU executing from 4000H FLASH write restriction2) 0 1 Not set 1 0 DEBUG DEBUG mode handler FLASH write disabled 0 1 Set 1 0 NORMAL CPU executing from 4000H FLASH write restriction2) 0 1 x 1 1 NORMAL CPU executing from 4000H FLASH write restriction2) CPU executing from 4000H 1) Do not use 2) FLASH programming and erasing is possible via Library functions Note: FLASH protection is done by hardware. MSE = 0 States or IDLE IDLE MSE = 1 PP0=1|1|0 PP1=1|0|1 Lockbyte 2 set RS IFLG or RETI WD MSE = 1 PP0=1 PP1=1 Lockbyte 2 not set Mode Select PDWN - Powerdown INIT IRQ RUN - Run application IDLE - CPU clock stopped RUN WD Transitions WU - Wakeup WU PE PE - Powerdown enable WD - Watchdog IFLG - Idle flag PDWN RS - Resume IRQ - Interrupt request RETI- Return from interrupt Figure 4 NORMAL mode - State Transition Diagram For low power consumption the PMA51xx supports different operating states - RUN state, IDLE state and POWER DOWN state. The device operation in these states is as described below. Data Sheet 30 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Transitions between these states are either controlled by application software or managed automatically by the System Controller. • • PDWN: Power down (CPU and peripherals are not supplied) IDLE: CPU clock stopped, peripherals are still running VReg V THR VPOR RESET (internal ) PP0, PP1 t Figure 5 POR t MODE Power On Reset - Operating Mode Selection During the time interval tMODE, the levels of PP0, PP1 and MSE are read, and the operation mode of the device determined according to Table 4 “Operating Mode Selection after Reset” on Page 30. The levels on these pins must be stable during the whole tMODE period. The PMA51xx's Power-On Reset circuit is activated if Vreg rises above VPOR. The internal blocks are held in Reset state until Vreg exceeds the level of VTHR. When this Reset state is released, a further time of tMODE is needed for reading the levels on PP0, PP1, and MSE. After tMODE has elapsed, the device starts operation in the selected mode. Note: See Table 44 “Power On Reset” on Page 193 for details on Power-On Reset characteristics. Data Sheet 31 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.1.2 State Description 2.1.2.1 INIT state This is a transient state after the System Reset, which is entered when the settings of PP0, PP1, MSE, TSE, and the Lockbyte 2 lead to NORMAL mode (please refer to Table 4 “Operating Mode Selection after Reset” on Page 30). It is also a transient state in NORMAL mode before the state change between PDWN and RUN or when a watchdog reset occurs in IDLE or RUN state. In INIT state, the relevant SFRs get reset to their default values. Then the application program in FLASH is started at 4000H and the device enters RUN state. 2.1.2.2 RUN state In the RUN state, the CPU executes the FLASH code. Peripherals are on or off according to the application program and the Watchdog Timer is active. All wake-up events except in ExtWUFs are ignored in the RUN state but the corresponding wake-up flags get set and can be read and cleared. Activity on the external wake-up pins can be monitored in the corresponding SFR P1In or P3In. 2.1.2.3 IDLE state In the IDLE state, the CPU clock is disabled but peripherals (Timers, ADC, RF-TX, LF-RX, SPI and I2C interface) continue normal operation. If a resume event occurs, the RUN state is reentered immediately. The Watchdog Timer is active and reset automatically when entering IDLE state. All wake-up events are ignored in IDLE state, but the corresponding flags are set if a wake-up occurs and can be evaluated once the device returns to the RUN state. If a peripheral requests an interrupt or an external interrupt occurs, the IDLE state is left for RUN state, the interrupt service routine is executed, and on the next RETI (return from interrupt) instruction the IDLE state is re-entered in case no resume event has occurred in between. Resume events The resume source can be identified by reading the Resume Event Flag, REF. Resume events may occur on the following events: • • • • • • • RF Transmitter buffer empty RF transmission finished LF Receiver buffer full Timer 2 underflow A/D conversion finished 2 kHz RC LP oscillator calibration finished Clock change from 12 MHz RC HF oscillator to crystal oscillator finished Interrupt requests Interrupts during IDLE state may be requested by embedded peripherals or external events. • • • • • • External (pin) interrupt 0/1 Timer 0/1/2/3 I2C interface SPI interface LF Receiver Manchester/Biphase Encoder Data Sheet 32 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.1.2.4 POWER DOWN state (PDWN) In the POWER DOWN state, the CPU and its peripherals are powered down. The System Controller, the XData memory, and optionally the lower 128-byte internal RAM are kept powered. Furthermore some SFRs are kept powered in the POWER DOWN state (see Table 12 “Special Function Registers Overview” on Page 61). The LF Receiver will be switched on periodically if the LF On/Off Timer is enabled. Wake-up flags are cleared automatically when going to POWER DOWN. Wake-up Events A wake-up event occurs when a peripheral or external source causes the system to power up again. The wakeup source can be identified by reading SFRs WUF and ExtWUF. Wake-up Events may occur on following events: • • • • • At least one of the External wake-up pins changed its state to the configured one Interval Timer underflow occurred LF Receiver carrier detected LF Receiver pattern matched LF Receiver sync matched 2.1.2.5 State Transitions With reference to Figure 4 “NORMAL mode - State Transition Diagram” on Page 30, the following state transitions can occur: Table 5 State Transitions in NORMAL mode State Transition Description RUN state => IDLE state (IFLG) The application program sets SFR bit CFG0.5[IDLE]1) to enter IDLE state. (see Configuration Register 0 on page 46) Note: If no peripheral that can create a RESUME event is active, IDLE state will not be entered and the application will continue operation. IDLE state RS: A peripheral unit (Timer 2, ADC, RF Transmitter, LF Receiver, system clock => RUN state (RS, IRQ) source switch) creates a resume event. The application continues with the instruction after the Idle bit setting (see Resume Event Flag Register on page 39). IRQ: An interrupt occurs. This interrupt allows the immediate execution of the interrupt service routine. With the return from interrupt instruction, the device returns to IDLE state if no resume event has been generated in between. IDLE state => INIT state (WD2)) RUN state => INIT state (WD) If the Watchdog Timer elapsed, the application will restart by initialization of some SFRs. Only the SFRs which are not supplied in POWER DOWN state are initialized after the Watchdog Timer elapsed (see Table 12 “Special Function Registers Overview” on Page 61). The Watchdog Timer wake-up may be identified by Wakeup Flag Register on page 40 RUN state Entering this state is always software-controlled by setting CFG0.7[PDWN]. The => POWER DOWN state application program calls a Library function to enter POWER DOWN state whenever (PDWN) needed. POWER DOWN state => INIT state A wake-up event will restart the application and set the SFR WUF resp. ExtWUF accordingly. The Watchdog Timer is re-initialized (see External Wake-up Flag Register on page 37). INIT state => RUN state This state change is initiated automatically by the System Controller as soon as INIT state is finished. 1) It is mandatory that the instruction setting the CFG0.5[IDLE] is followed by a NOP instruction. 2) WD .. Watchdog Timer Data Sheet 33 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Wake-up duration from POWER DOWN state through INIT state to RUN state typically lasts 1410 µs. The time is the sum of the time for the power supply to get stable (100 µs), the startup time of the oscillator (1150 µs) and the time for the operating system to get initialized (160 µs @ 12-MHz CPU clock). 2.1.2.6 Status of PMA5110 Blocks in Different States Depending of the actual state in NORMAL mode, the internal blocks of the PMA5110 are active, inactive or have no supply to reduce power consumption. The next table gives an overview of the various blocks in the different device states. Table 6 Status of Important PMA5110 Blocks in Different States Peripheral Unit RUN state IDLE state POWER DOWN state Power-On Reset Active Active Active Brown-Out Detector Active Active Inactive; power down Low-Power voltage supply Active Active Active System Controller Active Active Active Wake-up Logic Active Active Active CPU Active Inactive No supply Non-volatile SFRs (System Controller) Active Inactive; content not lost Inactive; content not lost Manchester/Biphase Coder, Timer Software selectable Software selectable Peripheral modules: CRC, Software selectable Inactive MLFSR No supply No supply Peripheral modules: I2C, SPI, ADC Software selectable Software selectable No supply Watchdog Timer Active Active No supply RAM Lower 128 byte Active Inactive; content not lost Selectable power down (content lost) or inactive (content not lost) RAM Upper 128 byte Active Inactive; content not lost No supply; content lost XData 16 byte Active Inactive; content not lost Inactive; content not lost FLASH memory Active Inactive; content not lost No supply; content not lost crystal oscillator Software selectable Software selectable No supply 2 kHz RC oscillator Active Active 12 MHz RC HF oscillator Software selectable Software selectable Power down (Remark: automatically enabled after Carrier Detect WU) Interval Timer Active Active LF Receiver Software selectable Software selectable Software selectable RF Transmitter Software selectable Software selectable No supply Vmin Detector Software selectable Software selectable No supply Active Active Note: Active: Block is powered, is active and keeps its register contents. Power consumption is high Inactive: Block is powered, cannot be used, but keeps its register contents. Power consumption is low No supply: Block is not powered, power consumption is very low. Data Sheet 34 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.2 System Controller While the microcontroller controls PMA51xx in the RUN state, the System Controller takes over control in the POWER DOWN state and the IDLE state. The System Controller handles the system clock, wake-up events, and system resets. System Controller 1) SFR Registers RNG Wakeup Logic IO- Port Control I/O Port Wakeup Power Supply Power Management LF-Receiver ON/OFF Timer 2x high sensitive differential 1x standard differential analog interfaces Sensor Interface ADC Delay Timer POR Resume Reset Handler Resume System Reset Temp. Sensor VBat Sensor Wakeup Wakeup RF-Transmitter Resume Timer 2 Resume EN EN Interval Timer Timer Calibration Unit LF ON/OFF Timer Interval Timer Resume 12MHz RC-HFOscillator Clock Controller Resume Crystal Oscillator Clock Divider intern 2kHz RC-LPOscillator 1) 8 bit pseudo random number generator System Clock Figure 6 Block Diagram of the System Controller 2.2.1 Wake-up Logic One of the key elements within the System Controller is the Wake-up Logic, which is responsible for transitions from the POWER DOWN state to the RUN state via the INIT state. The difference between Reset and Wake-up • • Reset - Either via Software Reset, Brownout Reset, Power-On Reset or Reset pin, the digital circuit is reset. Program execution starts at address 0000H to perform reset initialization routines (including operation mode selection), and will jump to the FLASH at address 4000H in NORMAL mode to execute the application program. Wake-up - Only the microcontroller and its peripheral units are reset. Program execution starts at address 0000H to perform wake-up initialization routines (for evaluating the wake-up source), and jumps to the FLASH at 4000H to execute the application program. Data Sheet 35 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Wake-up Event Handling Whenever a wake-up event occurs, the PMA51xx leaves the POWER DOWN state and enters the RUN state to execute the application code. This transition can be initiated by various sources. The wake-up source can be identified by reading SFR WUF and SFR ExtWUF, which are cleared on read out. On every wake-up SFR bit DSR.1[WUP] is set to 1B. A wake-up source can be enabled or disabled by setting the appropriate bits in SFR WUM and SFR ExtWUM. For security reasons, the Interval Timer wake-up cannot be masked and the Interval Timer cannot be disabled in NORMAL mode. The wake-up source (except the Watchdog Timer) is available during the whole RUN state. If an additional wakeup event occurs during the RUN state, the appropriate flag will be set, but the device won’t be forced through INIT state. Watchdog Timer Event A Watchdog Timer event occurs after the Watchdog Timer has elapsed. The Watchdog Timer, which is only active in RUN and IDLE state cannot be masked. See Chapter 2.4.1 for details about the Watchdog Timer. LF Receiver Wake-up Event The LF Receiver wake-up can be enabled by setting one of these bits: • • • SFR bit WUM.5 [LFCD] or SFR bit WUM.4 [LFSY] or SFR bit WUM.3 [LFPM1] and/or SFR bit WUM.2 [LFPM0] The wake-up source can be read in the SFR WUF. Note: The LF Receiver has to be configured appropriately for the particular wake-up modes. See Chapter 2.10.4 for details. External Wake-up Event I/O Port PP1-PP4 and PP6-PP9 can be configured to wake up the PMA51xx from the POWER DOWN state by an external source. Note: PP1-PP4 and PP6-PP9 have to be configured according to Chapter 2.15.3 for this feature. The appropriate bits in SFR ExtWUF are only set when the PMA51xx leaves the POWER DOWN state. In RUN state and IDLE state these bits are not set. Interval Timer Wake-up Event When the Interval Timer elapses, a wake-up event is generated and the POWER DOWN state is left. The wakeup can be identified by the application software reading SFR bit WUF.0 [ITIM]. The Interval Timer is reloaded automatically with actual values from register ITPR and immediately restarted, so the Interval Timer is even working in the RUN state. Note: The Interval Timer is not maskable in NORMAL mode, so the application will get Interval Timer wake-up events periodically. If these wake-up events occur during the RUN state, they will set the appropriate flag but not force the device through the INIT state. IDLE state and Resume Event Handling If switched to the IDLE state by setting SFR bit CFG0.5 [IDLE], the system clock to the microcontroller is gated off. This reduces the chip current consumption and simultaneously improves ADC resolution due to the lower noise level during the time that microcontroller is not clocked. Data Sheet 36 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Note: The IDLE state will only be entered if one of the units providing a resume event is enabled and active. Otherwise, the system will continue executing code in the RUN state without entering the IDLE state. Only few peripheral components are still active in the IDLE state. The Watchdog Timer is active and will be initialized automatically before entering the IDLE state; thus the IDLE state has a maximum duration of approx. 1 second before a Watchdog Timer wake-up occurs. The system clock to the microcontroller is re-enabled when a resume event occurs. The program code continues working where it was suspended. SFR bit CFG0.5 [IDLE] is automatically cleared after a resume event. The resume event source is available in SFR REF. The IDLE state will be left in case an interrupt event occurs. After completion of the Interrupt service, the IDLE state will be re-entered in case no resume event is pending. 2.2.1.1 Register Description Table 7 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Page Number WUF Wake-up Flag Register C0H XXXXXX0XB 40 WUM Wake-up Mask Register C1H UUUUUUUUB 41 REF Resume Event Flag Register D1H 00H 39 ExtWUF External Wake-up Flag Register F1H XXXXXXXXB 37 ExtWUM External Wake-up Mask Register F2H UUUUUUUUB 38 External Wake-up Flag Register ExtWUF External Wake-up Flag Register Offset Wakeup Value F1H XXXXXXXXB Reset Value 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EXTWU7 EXTWU6 EXTWU5 EXTWU4 EXTWU3 EXTWU2 EXTWU1 EXTWU0 rc rc rc rc rc rc rc rc Field Bits Type Description EXTWU7 7 rc External Wake-up event on PP9 EXTWU6 6 rc External Wake-up event on PP8 EXTWU5 5 rc External Wake-up event on PP7 EXTWU4 4 rc External Wake-up event on PP6 EXTWU3 3 rc External Wake-up event on PP4 Data Sheet 37 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Field Bits Type Description EXTWU2 2 rc External Wake-up event on PP3 EXTWU1 1 rc External Wake-up event on PP2 EXTWU0 0 rc External Wake-up event on PP1 External Wake-up Mask Register ExtWUM Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value F2H UUUUUUUUB FFH External Wake-up Mask Register 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MEXTWU7 MEXTWU6 MEXTWU5 MEXTWU4 MEXTWU3 MEXTWU2 MEXTWU1 MEXTWU0 rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw Field Bits Type Description MEXTWU7 7 rw Mask External Wake-up 7 (on PP9) 0B External wake-up 7 allowed 1B External wake-up 7 disabled MEXTWU6 6 rw Mask External Wake-up 6 (on PP8) 0B External wake-up 6 allowed External wake-up 6 disabled 1B MEXTWU5 5 rw Mask External Wake-up 5 (on PP7) 0B External wake-up 5 allowed 1B External wake-up 5 disabled MEXTWU4 4 rw Mask External Wake-up 4 (on PP6) 0B External wake-up 4 allowed 1B External wake-up 4 disabled MEXTWU3 3 rw Mask External Wake-up 3 (on PP4) 0B External wake-up 3 allowed 1B External wake-up 3 disabled MEXTWU2 2 rw Mask External Wake-up 2 (on PP3) 0B External wake-up 2 allowed 1B External wake-up 2 disabled MEXTWU1 1 rw Mask External Wake-up 1 (on PP2) 0B External wake-up 1 allowed 1B External wake-up 1 disabled MEXTWU0 0 rw Mask External Wake-up 0 (on PP1) 0B External wake-up 0 allowed 1B External wake-up 0 disabled Data Sheet 38 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Resume Event Flag Register REF Offset Wakeup Value D1H 00H Resume Event Flag Register Reset Value 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 REXTG Res READC RELFO RERFF RERFU RERC RET2 rc r rc rc rc rc rc rc Field Bits Type Description REXTG 7 rc Clock changed to Xtal clock Res 6 r For future use READC 5 rc A/D conversion complete RELFO 4 rc LF receive buffer full RERFF 3 rc RF transmission finished RERFU 2 rc RF transmit buffer empty RERC 1 rc RC calibration complete RET2 0 rc Timer 2 underflow Data Sheet 39 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Wake-up Flag Register WUF Wake-up Flag Register Offset Wakeup Value C0H XXXXXX0XB Reset Value 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WDOG Res LFCD LFSY LFPM1 LFPM0 Res ITIM rc rc rc rc rc Field Bits Type Description WDOG 7 rc Watchdog Timer Event Res 6 LFCD 5 rc LF RX carrier-detect Wake-up LFSY 4 rc LF RX sync-match Wake-up LFPM1 3 rc LF RX pattern 1-match Wake-up LFPM0 2 rc LF RX pattern 0-match Wake-up Res 1 ITIM 0 Data Sheet rc Reserved Reserved rc Interval Timer Wake-up 40 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Wake-up Mask Register WUM Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value C1H UUUUUUUUB FFH Wake-up Mask Register 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MWDOG Res MLFCD MLFSY MLFPM1 MLFPM0 Res MITIM rw rw rw rw r rw rw Field Bits Type Description MWDOG 7 rw Mask Watchdog Timer This bit does only have effect in TEST -, DEBUG - and PROGRAMMING mode. 0B Watchdog Timer event allowed. Always allowed in NORMAL mode! 1B Watchdog Timer event disabled Res 6 MLFCD 5 rw Mask LF RX carrier detected 0B LF RX carrier wake-up allowed 1B LF RX carrier wake-up disabled MLFSY 4 rw Mask LF RX sync match 0B LF RX sync match wake-up allowed 1B LF RX sync match wake-up disabled MLFPM1 3 rw Mask LF RX pattern 1 match 0B LF RX pattern 1 match wake-up allowed 1B LF RX pattern 1 match wake-up disabled MLFPM0 2 rw Mask LF RX pattern 0 match 0B LF RX pattern 0 match wake-up allowed 1B LF RX pattern 0 match wake-up disabled Res 1 r For future use MITIM 0 rw Mask Interval Timer Wake-up This bit does only have effect in TEST -, DEBUG - and PROGRAMMING mode. 0B Interval Timer wake-up allowed. Always allowed in NORMAL mode! 1B Interval Timer wake-up disabled Data Sheet Reserved 41 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.2.2 Interval Timer Interval Timer 2kHz RC LP Oscillator (uncalibrated) Figure 7 Precounter ITFSH [11:8] ITFSL [7:0] Postcounter Interval Wakeup ITPR [7:0] Interval Timer Block Diagram The Interval Timer is responsible for waking up the PMA51xx from the POWER DOWN state after a predefined time interval. It is clocked by the 2 kHz RC LP oscillator and incorporates two dividers: • • Precounter: Can be calibrated to the system clock and represents the time base. Postcounter: Configures the Interval Timer duration. It can be set from 1-256dec. Timing accuracy can be ensured by using a Library function that calibrates the precounter with the accurate system clock (see [1]). The Interval Timer duration is determined by the SFR ITPR. This value is calculated by using the following equation: Interval Timer period [ s ] = Figure 8 precounter ⋅ postcounter ⎡ 1⎤ f2kHz RC LP Oscillator ⎢ ⎥ ⎣s ⎦ Calculation of Interval Timer period The Postcounter (ITPR) is an 8-bit register. The maximum interval duration corresponds to 00H (multiplication with 256dec). 01H up to FFH corresponds to a multiplication with 1dec up to 255dec. Note: After writing SFR ITPR, some clock cycles are needed to activate the new setting. SFR bit CFG1.1 [ITInit] is cleared automatically when the new setting is activated. Interval Timer calibration Due to the deviation of the 2 kHz RC LP oscillator frequency calibration is necessary and done by counting clock cycles from the crystal oscillator or the 12 MHz RC HF oscillator (depending on the current system clock) during one 2 kHz RC LP oscillator period. The counted clock cycles are used to calculate the appropriate configuration values.The calibration is performed automatically by a Library function (see [1]). Data Sheet 42 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.2.3 Register Description Table 8 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Page Number ITPL Interval Timer Precounter Register Low Byte BAH UUUUUUUUB 44 ITPH Interval Timer Precounter Register High Byte BBH 0000UUUUB 43 ITPR Interval Timer Period Register BCH UUUUUUUUB 44 Interval Timer Precounter Register High Byte ITPH Interval Timer Precounter Register High Byte 7 Offset Wakeup Value BBH 0000UUUUB 4 03H 3 Res Reset Value 0 ITP11_8 rw Field Bits Res 7:4 ITP11_8 3:0 Data Sheet Type Description Reserved rw Interval Timer Precounter Register bit 11 down to bit 8 43 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Interval Timer Precounter Register Low Byte ITPL Interval Timer Precounter Register Low Byte Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value BAH UUUUUUUUB E8H 7 0 ITP7_0 rw Field Bits Type Description ITP7_0 7:0 rw Interval Timer Precounter Register bit 7 down to bit 0 Interval Timer Period Register ITPR Interval Timer Period Register Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value BCH UUUUUUUUB 01H 7 0 ITPR rw Field Bits Type Description ITPR 7:0 rw Interval Timer Period Register Note: These SFRs can be modified manually as well for using other (uncalibrated) precounter values. If the Interval Timer function is not needed for the application, it is recommended to set the registers ITPR, ITPL, ITPH to their maximal value of FFH to save power. In this case, the wake-up interval will be extended to maximal interval. Data Sheet 44 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.3 System Configuration Registers The system configuration registers are used for: • • • • Initiating state transitions System software reset Enabling or disabling peripherals Monitoring the operation mode, the system state, and peripherals 2.3.1 Register Description Table 9 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Page Number CFG2 Configuration Register 2 D8H 000U1000B 48 DSR Diagnosis and Status Register D9H 0XUU00XUB 49 CFG1 Configuration Register 1 E8H 000U000UB 47 CFG0 Configuration Register 0 F8H 0000U000B 46 Data Sheet 45 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Configuration Register 0 CFG0 Configuration Register 0 7 6 5 PDWN Res IDLE rw Offset Wakeup Value F8H 0000U000B 4 Reset Value 00H 1 Res rw 0 CLKSel0 rw Field Bits Type Description PDWN 7 rw POWER DOWN state Enable POWER DOWN state is entered, if this bit is set to 1B. This bit is automatically reset to 0B by the system controller after wake-up from POWER DOWN state. 0B RUN state 1B POWER DOWN state Res 6 IDLE 5 Res 4:1 CLKSel0 0 Data Sheet Reserved Must be set to 0B. rw IDLE state Enable IDLE state is entered, if this bit is set to 1B. This bit is automatically reset to 0B by the system controller after a resume event occurred. 0B RUN state 1B IDLE state Reserved rw Clock Source Select 0B 12 MHz RC HF oscillator (internal) Crystal oscillator is selected (external) 1B 46 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Configuration Register 1 CFG1 Configuration Register 1 Offset Wakeup Value E8H 000U000UB Reset Value 01H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PMWEn I2CEn Res RfTXPEn ADCEn SPIEn ITInit ITEn rw rw rw rw rw r r Field Bits Type Description PMWEn 7 rw Program Memory Write Enable 0B Write access to Flash program memory not allowed 1B Write access to Flash program memory allowed Note: Write operation to program memory is not feasible on standard 8051 microcontroller, thus write access has to be allowed explicitly I2CEn 6 rw I2C Enable 0B I2C-Interface disabled. Port Pins PP0 and PP1 are used as GPIOs 1B I2C-Interface enabled. Port Pins PP0 and PP1 are used for I2C communication Res 5 RfTXPEn 4 rw RF TX Port Out Enable 0B PP2 is used as GPIO 1B PP2 is used for serial output of Manchester/BiPhase coded RF TX data ADCEn 3 rw ADC Enable 0B ADC disabled ADC enabled 1B SPIEn 2 rw SPI Enable 0B SPI-Interface disabled. Port Pins PP3 to PP6 are used as GPIOs 1B SPI-Interface enabled. Port pins PP3 to PP6 are used for SPI communication ITInit 1 r Interval Timer Initialization active 0B No reload 1B (Re)loads the Interval Timer with content of ITPR/ITPH/ITPL. This bit is automatically cleared after initialization completes ITEn 0 r Interval Timer Enable1) 0B Interval Timer is deactivated (not possible in NORMAL mode) 1B Enables Interval Timer countdown Reserved 1) Interval Timer is always enabled in NORMAL mode Data Sheet 47 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Configuration Register 2 CFG2 Configuration Register 2 7 5 Res Wakeup Value D8H 000U1000B Reset Value 18H 4 3 2 1 0 PDLMB PDADC Res WDRES RESET rw rw cw cw Field Bits Res 7:5 PDLMB 4 rw Power Down iRAM lower memory block 0B Contents of lower 128 byte of data memory (00H-7FH) are kept active also in POWER DOWN state 1B Contents of lower 128 byte of data memory (00H-7FH) are lost in POWER DOWN state PDADC 3 rw Power Down ADC 0B ADC analog circuit is supplied 1B ADC power down (ADC analog circuit not supplied) Res 2 WDRES 1 cw Reset Watchdog Timer 0B Default 1B Watchdog Timer is reset and restarts counting from zero Note: WDRES is cleared automatically RESET 0 cw Reset System 0B Default 1B A software-assigned system reset is done. Note: Bit RESET is cleared automatically. Data Sheet Type Offset Description Reserved Reserved 48 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Diagnosis and Status Register DSR Diagnosis and Status Register 7 6 SCLK Res 5 r Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value D9H 0XUU00XUB 0XXX0000B 4 3 2 1 0 OpMODE Res WUP FlashLC K r r r w Field Bits Type Description SCLK 7 r Currently selected system clock 0B 12 MHz RC HF oscillator clock selected 1B Crystal oscillator clock selected Res 6 OpMODE 5:4 r Operation Mode Operation Mode applied at chip startup. 00B TEST mode 01B PROGRAMMING mode 10B DEBUG mode 11B NORMAL mode Res 3:2 r Reserved WUP 1 r Wake-up Pending This bit can be used for decision reset / wake-up. 0B No wake-up pending 1B Wake-up is pending (read detailed information from WUF/ExtWUF) FlashLCK 0 w FLASH Lock Is set to 1B by SW if Lockbyte 3 is set (D1H is detected at FLASH address 57FFH). If Lockbyte 3 is set without setting Lockbyte 2, this byte has no effect and will result a unlocked FLASH. 0B Full FLASH access (FLASH related SFRs) 1B Restricted write access Data Sheet Reserved 49 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.4 Fault Protection The PMA5110 features multiple fault protections that prevent the application from incurring unexpected behavior and deadlocks. This chapter gives a brief overview of the available fault protections. 2.4.1 Watchdog Timer For operation security, a Watchdog Timer is available to avoid application deadlocks. The Watchdog Timer must be reset periodically by the microcontroller, otherwise the timer generates a reset and forces a restart of PMA5110 program execution. The SFRs which are not supplied in POWER DOWN state are initialized after a reset generated by the Watchdog Timer. The Watchdog Timer is automatically reset by a Power On reset, Brown Out reset, xReset, software reset (CFG2.0[RESET]) or when the IDLE state is entered. The Watchdog Timer duration is fixed to a nominal period of 1 s. The accuracy depends on the accuracy of the 2 kHz RC LP oscillator that is used to clock the Watchdog Timer. Setting SFR bit CFG2.1 [WDRES] resets the Watchdog Timer (see Configuration Register 0). If a Watchdog Timer overflow occurred SFR bit WUF.7 [WDOG] is set to 1B. 2.4.2 Vmin Detector This circuit will detect if the supply voltage is below the minimum value required to guarantee correct chip operation. The Library functions that perform measurements will return the Vmin status in a status byte with the measurement result. The Vmin Detector can be used to either monitor the internal regulated supply voltage or the external supply voltage VBat. The selection of the supply voltage to monitor is done with bit LBD.3 [LBD2V1]. If enabled by LBD.1[LBDEn] and LBD.0[LBDMEn], the power supply voltage is sensed and bit LBD.2 [LBDF] is set to 1B, if the supply voltage drops below threshold during measurement time. 2.4.2.1 Register Description Low Battery Detector Control LBD Low Battery Detector Control 7 Offset Wakeup Value EFH 0BH 4 Res Field Bits Res 7:4 Data Sheet Type Reset Value 0BH 3 2 1 0 LBD2V1 LBDF LBDEn LBDMen rw rc rw rw Description Reserved 50 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Field Bits Type Description LBD2V1 3 rw Low Battery Voltage Switch 0B VDDD (internal voltage) 1B VBat (external voltage) LBDF 2 rc Low Battery Detector Flag 0B Supply voltage is higher then threshold voltage 1B Supply voltage is lower then threshold voltage LBDEn 1 rw Low Battery Detector enable 0B Low Battery Detector disabled 1B Low Battery Detector enabled LBDMen 0 rw Low Battery Detector measurement enable Note: LBDEn must be enabled at least 10us before LBDMEn can be set in order to start the measurement 0B 1B 2.4.3 Stop measurement Start measurement Brownout Detector The Brownout Detector resets the PMA when the supply voltage drops below VBRD in RUN state and below VPDBR in POWER DOWN state (see Table 44 “Power On Reset” on Page 193). 2.4.4 FLASH Memory Checksum A CRC checksum is stored in the FLASH memory. After Lockbyte 2 is written, the CRC checksum can be recalculated and checked by the application program for verification of program code if needed. If a single bit error in the FLASH memory occurs, it is corrected by the FLASH internal Error Correction Coder, as an indication the FCSP.7 [ECCErr] bit is set. (see FLASH Control Register - Sector Protection Control on page 59) 2.4.5 ADC Measurement Overflow and Underflow The Library functions that perform measurements will return the over/underflow status in a status byte with the measurement result. Data Sheet 51 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.5 Clock Controller The Clock Controller for internal clock management is part of the System Controller. The PMA51xx always starts up using the 12 MHz RC HF oscillator to provide minimum startup time and minimum current consumption. Changing the system clock from the 12 MHz RC HF oscillator to the crystal (e.g. for RF transmission) is performed automatically by calling a Library function (see [1]). If the crystal is selected as system clock, the 12 MHz RC HF oscillator is automatically powered down. Note: Since the external crystal needs some startup time, a 3-bit delay timer is integrated to delay the clock switching. Depending on the crystal used, the SFR bits XTCFG.2-0 [XTDLY2-0] can be set to delay from typ. 0 µs up to 1750 µs in 250 µs steps (see XTAL Configuration Register). The following figure shows which clocks are used for which PMA5110 blocks. Details about the individual blocks can be found in the appropriate chapters of this document LF Receiver 12 MHz RC HF Oscillator Crystal Oscillator 19,6875 MHz 18,0833 MHz 19,0625 MHz Baudrate Generator SFR LFDIV SFR CFG0 ClkSel Data Recovery :2 Syncronizer RF Transmitter Manchester / BiPhase Encoder (PLL, VCO) ADC 2 kHz RC LP Oscillator Interval Timer Precounter SFR ITFSL/H SFR DIVIC :64/:16/:4/:1 Postcounter SFR ITPR Microcontroller CPU SPI LF On/Off Timer Precounter SFR LFOOTP Pseudo Random Number Generator I2 C ON/Off counter SFR LFOOT Timer 0/1 GPIOs CRC Generator/ Checker Timer 2/3 :6 SFR TMOD PP2 / Event Figure 9 PMA5110 Clock Concept 2.5.1 Internal Clock Divider Baudrate Generator RF Encoder General Purpose Timer To save power, it is possible to enable the internal clock divider to reduce the system clock by a prescaled factor. If SFR DIVIC is set to 00H (default), the divider is disabled. For a description of the SFR DIVIC see Internal Clock Divider on page 54. 2.5.2 2 kHz RC LP Oscillator (Low Power) The 2 kHz RC LP oscillator stays always active. Data Sheet 52 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.5.3 12 MHz RC HF Oscillator (High Frequency) The 12 MHz RC HF oscillator typically runs at 12 MHz. It is used as the default clock source for the PMA51xx in RUN state. 2.5.4 Crystal Oscillator The nominal crystal operating frequencies are between 18 MHz and 20 MHz depending on the RF band used. 868 MHz / 915 MHz : f XTAL [ Hz ] = fRF [ Hz ] ⋅ 1 48 434 MHz : f XTAL [ Hz ] = fRF [ Hz ] ⋅ 2 48 315 MHz : f XTAL [ Hz ] = fRF [ Hz ] ⋅ 3 48 Figure 10 Formulas for Crystal selection dependent of RF Bands Frequency pulling from the nominal crystal frequency is achieved by the internal capacitor banks. This is used for fine-tuning the ASK carrier frequency and the lower and upper modulation frequencies for FSK modulation. Thus, frequency differences due to crystals that are not exactly matched or differences in component tolerances can be trimmed device internal. XTAL 18 - 20 MHz C Crystal Oscillator FSK-Modulator XCAP FSK Data 8 XGND Figure 11 8bit data SFR XTAL0 8bit data SFR XTAL1 Crystal Oscillator and FSK-Modulator Block Diagram Trimming of the Crystal Oscillator The crystal oscillator can be trimmed using the internal capacitor array or externally. To use the internal capacitor array SFR bit RFTX.7 [XCapSH] has to be set to 0B. The SFRs SFR XTAL0 and SFR XTAL1 allow the trimming of the crystal frequency in a broad range using the internal capacitor array. Setting SFR bit RFTX.7 [XCapSH] to 1B shorts the internal capacitor array and the crystal oscillator can be trimmed externally. Data Sheet 53 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.5.5 Register Description Table 10 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Page Number DIVIC Internal Clock Divider B9H 000000UUB 54 XTCFG XTAL Configuration Register C2H 00000UUUB 56 XTAL1 XTAL Frequency Register FSKHIGH/ASK C3H UUUUUUUUB 55 XTAL0 XTAL Frequency Register FSKLOW C4H UUUUUUUUB 55 Internal Clock Divider DIVIC Internal Clock Divider Offset Wakeup Value B9H 000000UUB 7 2 Res Reset Value 00H 1 0 DIVIC rw Field Bits Res 7:2 DIVIC 1:0 Data Sheet Type Description Reserved rw System Clock Divider Factor System clock, selected with CFG0.0[CLKSel0], is divided by 00B 1 01B 4 10B 16 11B 64 54 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description XTAL Frequency Register FSKLOW XTAL0 XTAL Frequency Register FSKLOW Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value C4H UUUUUUUUB FFH 7 0 FSKLOW w Field Bits Type Description FSKLOW 7:0 w FSK Low Frequency Capacitor select for lower FSK modulation frequency if RFENC.3[TXDD] = 0B and RFTX.5[ASKFSK] = 0B. The capacitor array is binary weighted from FSKLOW.7 = 20pF (MSB) down to FSKLOW.0 = 156fF (LSB) XTAL Frequency Register FSKHIGH/ASK XTAL1 XTAL Frequency Register FSKHIGH/ASK Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value C3H UUUUUUUUB FFH 7 0 FSKHASK w Field Bits Type Description FSKHASK 7:0 w FSK High Frequency Capacitor select for upper FSK modulation frequency if RFENC.3[TXDD] = 1B and RFTX.5[ASKFSK] = 0B ASK Center Frequency Capacitor select for ASK center frequency fine tuning if RFENC.3[TXDD] = 1B and RFTX.5[ASKFSK] = 1B The capacitor array is binary weighted from FSKHASK.7 = 20pF (MSB) down to FSKHASK.0 = 156fF (LSB) Data Sheet 55 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description XTAL Configuration Register XTCFG XTAL Configuration Register Offset Wakeup Value C2H 00000UUUB 7 3 Res Reset Value 03H 2 0 XTDLY rw Field Bits Res 7:3 XTDLY 2:0 Data Sheet Type Description Reserved rw XTAL Startup Delay Time Delay time in steps of 250µs @ typ. 2 kHz RC LP oscillator clock = 2 kHz 000B typ. 0µs 001B typ. 250µs 010B typ. 500µs 011B typ. 750µs 100B typ. 1000µs 101B typ. 1250µs 110B typ. 1500µs 111B typ. 1750µs 56 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.6 Memory Organization Nonvolatile Code memory Data memory FFFFH Not implemented Flash Configuration 64B Unique -ID Flash Configuration FLASH 6kB 128 B User Data Sector II 128 B Lockbyte 3 User Data Sector I FFH Data RAM 58 C0H 256 58 BEH byte Optional battery buffered Data RAM 58 B8H Indirect addressing 5880 H Code Vectors upper 128 bytes 80H 7F H lower 128 bytes 00H Direct addressing 5800 H Xdata memory 5780 H CRC Sum + Lockbyte 2 6016 B SFR RAM 4033 H 16 4000 H byte Not implemented 0F H Battery buffered Data RAM accessible with movx 00H 3003 H Code Memory mapped SFRs 3000 H Revision number, Checksum ROM 12 kB Mode Handlers Library Functions 007 F H Vectors Figure 12 0000 H Memory Map The Following Memory Blocks are implemented • • • • • • 12 kbyte ROM 6 kbyte FLASH code memory 2x128 byte User FLASH code/data memory 64 byte read-only FLASH configuration and unique-ID 2x128 byte data RAM, of which 128 bytes may be battery buffered 16 byte battery-buffered XData RAM Data Sheet 57 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.6.1 ROM A 12 kbyte ROM is located in the address range 0000H to 2FFFH. Function Library and Reset/Wake-up Handlers The ROM contains the reset handler, the wake-up handler, and the Function Library (see [1]). A hardware mechanism is implemented to prevent direct jumping into the ROM area. Access to the Library functions is granted via a vector table at the bottom of the ROM address space. ROM protection A hardware mechanism protects the ROM code against readout, so a read operation from the ROM in the protected address area returns zero. 2.6.2 FLASH 2.6.2.1 FLASH Organization The FLASH is divided into four sectors. Each sector can be erased and written individually (byte wise erasing and writing is not possible). • • • 4000H -- 577FH (6016 byte) code sector (sector 0): This sector contains the code sector for the application program. 5780H -- 587FH (2x128 byte) User Data sector I + User Data sector II (sector 1 + sector 2): These two sectors contain the user data sector, which can store individual device configuration data. The crystal frequency that is needed for the Library functions could also be saved here. 5880H -- 58BFH (64 byte) configuration sector (sector 3): This sector contains the FLASH configuration sector for FLASH driver parameters and is write protected. 2.6.2.2 FLASH Protection Write and erase operations on the FLASH code sector are only allowed in PROGRAMMING mode. To protect the FLASH against unauthorized access, three Lockbytes can be set: • • • Lockbyte 1: This is written at the end of production test. The FLASH configuration sector is irreversibly switched to read-only. Lockbyte 2: Address 577FH (Top address of the code sector). This byte (as well as a ROM CRC) is optionally written by the programmer together with the code download. When the reset handler detects this byte, it sets the FCSP.1[CodeLCK]. When this bit is set, the DEBUG mode and PROGRAMMING mode are no longer accessible. Their pin settings lead to NORMAL mode wherein the CRC can be checked. This Lockbyte has to be set while programming the code sector to protect application code against undesired read-out. Lockbyte 3: Address 57FFH (Top of User Data Sector I). Lockbyte 3 can be set by the programmer during program download or by the application. After Lockbyte 3 has been set, a reset is necessary to get the User Data Sectors locked. Write accesses to the FLASH registers are blocked after Lockbyte 3 has been set. If Lockbyte 3 is set without setting Lockbyte 2, this byte has no effect and will result in an unlocked FLASH. How to set Lockbyte 3 is described in Chapter 2.18.6. Data Sheet 58 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.6.2.3 Register Description FLASH Control Register - Sector Protection Control FCSP FLASH Control Register - Sector Protection Control 7 Offset Wakeup Value E9H 000000UUB 6 2 Res ECCErr rc Reset Value 00H 1 0 CodeLCK ConfLCK rw rw Field Bits Type Description ECCErr 7 rc ECC Error Detected Bit 0B No Error Detected 1B Error Detected Res 6:2 CodeLCK 1 rw Code Sector Lock Bit Is set to 1B by SW if Lockbyte 2 is set (D1H is detected at FLASH address 577FH). programmable & erasable 0B 1B Read only ConfLCK 0 rw Config Sector Lock Bit Is set to 1B by SW if FLASH configuration sector has been locked (switched to read only). 0B programmable & erasable 1B Read only Data Sheet Reserved 59 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.6.3 RAM The RAM is available as data storage for the application program. Library functions may use some RAM locations for passing parameters and internal calculations. The RAM area that is used for the Library functions is specified in [1]. The RAM is always powered in RUN state and IDLE state. The upper 128 bytes of RAM are always switched off in POWER DOWN state and lose their contents in these states. SFR bit CFG2.4[PDLMB] determines if the lower 128 byte of RAM are powered during POWER DOWN state. If not powered in these states, this RAM loses the content, otherwise it can be used as battery-buffered storage after a POWER DOWN period. Note: The RAM is not reset during a System Reset. After a Brown Out Reset, this feature can be used to try to recover data from RAM. After Power On Reset, the RAM is not initialized, and thus contains random data. The application has to initialize the RAM if needed. 2.6.4 Code Memory mapped SFRs The code memory mapped SFRs can be used to implement an opcode which can be modified in runtime, for example to access SFRs or to implement variable jump addresses. The registers MMR0, MMR1, and MMR2 - additionally mapped to address 3000H - 3002H may contain up to 3-byte opcode. Code address 3003H contains a hard coded return statement (RET). 2.6.4.1 Register Description Table 11 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Reset Value MMR0 Memory Mapped Register 0 84H 00H 00H MMR1 Memory Mapped Register 1 85H 00H 00H MMR2 Memory Mapped Register 2 86H 00H 00H Data Sheet 60 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.6.5 Battery buffered data RAM There are 16 bytes of battery buffered data RAM available that can be used by the application to store data during a POWER DOWN state period. This memory consumes relatively little leakage current compared to the whole lower memory block by storing small amount of data. Note: The battery buffered data RAM is located in the xdata area and therefore not reset by a System Reset. After a Brownout Reset, this feature can be used to possibly recover data from RAM. After a Power-On Reset, this memory is not initialized, and thus contain random data. The application has to initialize the battery buffered data RAM. 2.6.6 Special Function Registers Special Function Registers (SFRs) are used to control and monitor the status of the PMA51xx and its peripherals. The following table shows the naming convention for the SFR descriptions that are used throughout this document. R/C/W - 0/0 Value after Power On Reset Value after wakeup from POWER DOWN state x …status dependent on environmental setting u ... unchanged 1 ... high 0 ... low Access: R ... Readable C ... Automatically cleared after Read W ... Writeable Figure 13 Naming Convention for Register Descriptions Note: If a single bit or the whole byte value is declared as unchanged, it keeps its state even during POWER DOWN state. Table 12 “Special Function Registers Overview” on Page 61 shows the power supply of each SFR and gives a reference to the page within this document where a detailed description can be found. Table 12 Special Function Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Register Address Supplied in PDWN Description ACC Accumulator E0H No Page 65 ADCC0 ADC Configuration Register 0 DBH No Page 116 ADCC1 ADC Configuration Register 1 DCH No Page 118 ADCDL ADC Result Register (low byte) D4H No Page 119 ADCDH ADC Result Register (high byte) D5H No Page 119 ADCM ADC Mode Register D2H No Page 120 ADCOFF ADC Input Offset c-network configuration DAH No Page 121 ADCS ADC Status Register D3H No Page 122 B Register B F0H No Page 65 CFG0 Configuration Register 0 F8H Yes Page 46 Data Sheet 61 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Table 12 Special Function Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Register Address Supplied in PDWN Description CFG1 Configuration Register 1 E8H Yes Page 47 CFG2 Configuration Register 2 D8H Yes Page 48 CRCC CRC Control Register A9H No Page 125 CRCD CRC Data Register AAH No Page 126 CRC0 CRC Shift Register (low byte) ACH No Page 126 CRC1 CRC Shift Register (high byte) ADH No Page 127 DIVIC Internal Clock Divider B9H Yes Page 54 DPL Data Pointer (low byte) 82H No Page 65 DPH Data Pointer (high byte) 83H No Page 65 DSR Diagnosis and Status Register D9H No Page 49 ExtWUF External Wake-up Flag Register F1H Yes Page 37 ExtWUM External Wake-up Mask Register F2H Yes Page 38 FCSP FLASH Control Register Sector Protection Control E9H No Page 59 I2CB I2C Baud rate Register I2CC I2CD I2CM B1H No Page 160 2 A2H No Page 161 2 9AH No Page 162 2 A3H No Page 162 2 I C Control Register I C Data Register I C Mode Register I2CS I C Status Register 9BH No Page 163 IE Interrupt Enable Register A8H No Page 69 IP Interrupt Priority Register B8H No Page 70 IRQRF Interrupt Request Flag Register (for extended interrupts) 8FH No Page 71 ITPL Interval Timer Precounter Register (low byte) BAH Yes Page 44 ITPH Interval Timer Precounter Register (high byte) BBH Yes Page 43 ITPR Interval Timer Period Register BCH Yes Page 44 LBD Low Battery Detector Control EFH No Page 50 LFCDFlt LF Carrier Detect Filtering B2H Yes Page 94 LFCDM LF Carrier Detector Mode B5H Yes Page 95 LFDIV0 LF Division Factor (low byte) B3H Yes Page 96 LFDIV1 LF Division Factor (high byte) B4H Yes Page 96 LFOOT LF On/Off Timer Configuration Register C6H Yes Page 97 LFOOTP LF On/Off Timer Precounter Register C5H Yes Page 98 LFPCFG LF Pattern Detection Configuration Register C7H Yes Page 100 Data Sheet 62 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Table 12 Special Function Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Register Address Supplied in PDWN Description LFP0L LF Pattern 0 Detector Sequence Data LSB BEH Yes Page 99 LFP0H LF Pattern 0 Detector Sequence Data MSB BFH Yes Page 98 LFP1L LF Pattern 1 Detector Sequence Data LSB CEH Yes Page 100 LFP1H LF Pattern 1 Detector Sequence Data MSB CFH Yes Page 99 LFRX0 LF Receiver Configuration Register 0 B7H Yes Page 101 LFRX1 LF Receiver Configuration Register 1 B6H Yes Page 102 LFRXC LF Receiver Control Register F9H Yes Page 103 LFRXD LF Receiver Data Register A5H Yes Page 104 LFRXS LF Receiver Status Register A4H Yes Page 105 LFSYNCFG LF SYNC Matching Configuration Register AFH Yes Page 107 LFSYN0 LF Sync Pattern (low byte) A6H Yes Page 106 LFSYN1 LF Sync Pattern (high byte) A7H Yes Page 106 MMR0 Memory Mapped Register 0 84H No Page 60 MMR1 Memory Mapped Register 1 85H No Page 60 MMR2 Memory Mapped Register 2 86H No Page 60 P1DIR IO-Port 1 Direction Register 91H Yes Page 150 P1IN IO-Port 1 Data IN Register 92H Yes Page 152 P1OUT IO-Port 1 Data OUT Register 90H Yes Page 153 P1SENS IO-Port 1 Sensitivity Register 93H Yes Page 154 P3DIR IO-Port 3 Direction Register EBH Yes Page 151 P3IN IO-Port 3 Data IN Register ECH Yes Page 152 P3OUT IO-Port 3 Data OUT Register B0H Yes Page 153 P3SENS IO-Port 3 Sensitivity Register EDH Yes Page 155 PSW Program Status Word D0H No Page 66 REF Resume Event Flag Register D1H No Page 39 RFC RF Transmitter Control Register EEH No Page 77 RFD RF Encoder Tx Data Register 8EH No Page 77 RFENC RF Encoder Tx Control Register E7H No Page 78 RFFSPLL RF Frequency Synthesizer PLL Configuration D7H No Page 80 RFS RF Encoder Tx Status Register E6H No Page 81 RFFSLD RF Frequency Synthesizer Lock Detector Configuration DFH Yes Page 79 Data Sheet 63 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Table 12 Special Function Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Register Address Supplied in PDWN Description RFTX RF Transmitter Configuration Register AEH Yes Page 82 RFVCO RF Frequency Synthesizer VCO Configuration DEH Yes Page 83 RNGD RNG Data Register ABH Yes Page 128 SP Stack Pointer 81H No Page 65 SPIB SPI Baud rate Register (11 bit cascaded register) F3H No Page 171 SPIC SPI Control Register F4H No Page 172 SPID SPI Data Register F5H No Page 173 SPIM SPI Mode Register F6H No Page 173 SPIS SPI Status Register F7H No Page 175 TCON Timer Control Register (Timer 0/1) 88H No Page 132 TCON2 Timer Control Register 2 (Timer 2/3) C8H No Page 143 TH0 Timer 0 Register (high byte) 8CH No Page 133 TH1 Timer 1 Register (high byte) 8DH No Page 133 TH2 Timer 2 Register (high byte) CDH No Page 144 TH3 Timer 3 Register (high byte) CBH No Page 144 TL0 Timer 0 Register (low byte) 8AH No Page 134 TL1 Timer 1 Register (low byte) 8BH No Page 134 TL2 Timer 2 Register (low byte) CCH No Page 145 TL3 Timer 3 Register (low byte) CAH No Page 145 TMOD Timer Mode Register (Timer 0/1) 89H No Page 135 TMOD2 Timer Mode Register 2 (Timer 2/3) C9H No Page 146 WUF Wake-up Flag Register C0H Yes Page 40 WUM Wake-up Mask Register C1H Yes Page 41 XTAL0 XTAL Frequency Register (FSKLOW) C4H Yes Page 55 XTAL1 XTAL Frequency Register (FSKHIGH/ASK) C3H Yes Page 55 XTCFG XTAL Configuration Register C2H Yes Page 56 Data Sheet 64 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.7 Microcontroller Central part of the PMA51xx is an 8051 instruction set compatible microcontroller. The CPU offers an 8 bit data path, an interrupt controller, several addressing modes (direct, register, register indirect, bit direct), and accesses peripheral components using Special Function Registers (SFR). The architecture of the CPU is well known and not part of this description. However some of the features are not needed or adapted to special product requirements. These features are described herein in detail. The CPU incorporates basic core internal registers. Accumulator (ACC), Register B (B) and Program Status Word (PSW) are bit addressable registers used to perform arithmetical and logical operations. Stack Pointer (SP) and Data Pointer (DPL/DPH) are included to allow basic programming structures. 2.7.1 Register Description Table 13 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Reset Value SP Stack Pointer 81H 07H 07H DPL Data Pointer (low byte) 82H 00H 00H DPH Data Pointer (high byte) 83H 00H 00H PSW Program Status Word D0H 00H 00H ACC Accumulator E0H 00H 00H B Register B F0H 00H 00H Data Sheet 65 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Program Status Word SFR PSW holds the result of basic arithmetic operations. PSW Program Status Word Offset Wakeup Value D0H 00H Reset Value 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CY AC F0 RS1 RS0 OV F1 P rw rw rw rw rw rw rw r Field Bits Type Description CY 7 rw Carry Bit Set to 1B if ACC changes signed number range through 00H/FFH (unsigned range overflow). AC 6 rw Auxiliary Carry Bit Carry-out for BCD operations. F0 5 rw General Purpose Bit 0 May be freely used by software. RS1 4 rw Register Select Bit 1 Register bank select bit 1. RS0 3 rw Register Select Bit 0 Register bank select bit 2. OV 2 rw Overflow Bit Set to 1B if ACC changes signed number range through 80H/7FH with arithmetic operations (signed range overflow). F1 1 rw General Purpose Bit 1 May be freely used by software. P 0 r Parity Bit Reflects the number of 1s in the ACC (set to 1B if ACC contains an odd number of 1s) Data Sheet 66 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.8 Interrupt Sources As in the integrated CPU, the rest of PMA5110 supports interrupt events from several sources which are listed in Table 14. When an unmasked interrupt occurs, the Program Counter (PC) is automatically set to the vector assigned to the interrupt source. From there, the vector is forwarded via LJMP instruction into the FLASH area and the offset of 4000H is added. When an unmasked interrupt occurs while the device is in IDLE state, this state is immediately left and the PC continues operation on the appropriate interrupt vector. After the processing of the Interrupt Service Routine (ISR) (RETI instruction), the device automatically returns to the IDLE state in case no Resume Event has occurred in between. If a Resume Event has been detected during the ISR, the RETI instruction returns the PC to the location after the Idle instruction. It is highly recommended that this instruction to be a NOP. The priority of the interrupts can be configured using the IP register. Setting a bit in IP to one assigns higher priority to the linked interrupt. A high-priority interrupt can then interrupt a service routine from a low-priority interrupt. Table 14 Interrupt Vector Locations Interrupt Vector Vector Address Forwarded Interrupt Source Address Reset Vector 00H 4000H Vector 0 03H 4003H External Interrupt 0 (PP9) Vector 1 0BH 400BH Timer 0 Interrupt Vector 2 13H 4013H External Interrupt 1 (PP7) Vector 3 1BH 401BH Timer 1 Interrupt Vector 4 23H 4023H I2C Interface Interrupt Vector 5 2BH 402BH SPI Interface Interrupt Vector 6 33H 4033H Extended Interrupt: The FLASH software has to detect the interrupt source peripheral from this Vector by reading IRQFR and the appropriate source within the peripheral from the various flag registers. • Timer 2 Interrupt • Timer 3 Interrupt • LF Receiver Interrupt • RF Encoder Interrupt 2.8.1 External Interrupts 0 and 1 The PMA51xx has two external interrupt sources, Ext_Int0 on PP9 and Ext_Int1 on PP7. According to the 8051 standard implementation, the control bits and interrupt flags can be found in the TCON register (please refer to Timer Control Register Timer 0/1 on page 132). When enabled by setting IE.0 [EX0] for External Interrupt 0 (resp. IE.2 [EX1] for External Interrupt 1), interrupts can be generated from PP9 (resp. PP7). External Interrupts 0 and 1 can be programmed to be level-activated or negative-transition activated by clearing or setting bit TCON.0 [IT0], respectively TCON.2 [IT1]. If bit ITx=0, the corresponding external interrupt is triggered by a detected low-level at the pin. If ITx=1, the corresponding external interrupt is negative edgetriggered. In this mode, if successive samples of the pin show a high in one cycle and a low in the next cycle, interrupt request flag IEx in TCON is set. Flag bit IEx=1 then requests the interrupt. Data Sheet 67 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description If the external interrupt is level-activated, the external source has to hold the request active until the requested interrupt is actually generated. Then it has to deactivate the request before the ISR is completed, or else another interrupt will be generated. Each of the external interrupts has its own interrupt vector. 2.8.2 Timer Interrupts All four timers on the PMA51xx can be used as interrupt sources. While Timer 0 and Timer 1 are fully compatible with the original 8051 CPU (for a description please refer to “Timer/Counter interrupts” on Page 76), Timer 2 and Timer 3 interrupts are treated as extended interrupts. 2.8.3 I2C Interface Interrupts The data transfer on the I2C interface can be controlled via interrupts. This module has a separate interrupt vector (vector address 4023H) where the PC is automatically set whenever one of the I2C interrupt flags is active and the interrupt source is unmasked. 2.8.4 SPI Interface Interrupts The data transfer on the SPI interface can be controlled via interrupts. This module has a separate interrupt vector (vector address 402BH) where the PC is automatically set whenever one of the SPI interrupt flags is active and the interrupt source is unmasked. 2.8.5 LF Receiver Interrupts While one feature of the LF Receiver is to wake up the device, it is also possible to receive data via the LF interface in RUN mode by selecting the 12 MHz RC oscillator as the system clock. The wake-up flags are used as interrupt event flags, and wake-up mask bits are used as interrupt mask bits as well. Interrupt Flags • • • • WUF.5 [LFCD]: Carrier detected WUF.4 [LFSY]: Sync match detected WUF.3 [LFPM1]: Pattern match pattern 1 WUF.2 [LFPM0]: Pattern match pattern 0 Interrupt Mask bits • • • • WUM.5 [LFCD]: If set to 1 the carrier detector interrupt is masked (disabled) WUM.4 [LFSY]: If set to 1 the sync match interrupt is masked (disabled) WUM.3 [LFPM1]: If set to 1 the pattern match interrupt for pattern 1 is masked (disabled) WUM.2 [LFPM0]: If set to 1 the pattern match interrupt for pattern 0 is masked (disabled) In addition the extended interrupt sources have to be enabled by setting IE.6 [EID] to 1. 2.8.6 RF Encoder Interrupts The CPU should be kept in the IDLE state during RF transmission, this leads to a better emission spectrum. Nevertheless, it is possible to coordinate the data transfer interrupt driven. Therefore, two interrupt sources are available for RF transmission: RF Encoder interrupt source flags: • • RFS.0 [RFBF] RF Encoder Buffer Full RFS.1 [RFSE] RF Encoder Shift Register Empty Data Sheet 68 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.8.7 Register Description Table 15 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Page Number IRQFR Interrupt Request Flag Register for extended interrupts 8FH 00H 71 IE Interrupt Enable Register A8H 00H 69 IP Interrupt Priority Register B8H 00H 70 Interrupt Enable Register IE Interrupt Enable Register Offset Wakeup Value A8H 00H Reset Value 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EA EID ESPI EI2C ET1 EX1 ET0 EX0 rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw Field Bits Type Description EA 7 rw Global interrupt enable 0B All interrupts are disabled 1B Interrupts enabled according to their enable bits EID 6 rw Enable extended interrupts Timer 2/3, LF Receiver, RF Encoder 0B Interrupts disabled 1B Interrupts enabled according to their enable bits ESPI 5 rw Enable interrupts from SPI 0B Interrupts disabled 1B Interrupts enabled EI2C 4 rw Enable interrupts from I2C 0B Interrupts disabled 1B Interrupts enabled according to their enable bits ET1 3 rw Enable interrupts from Timer 1 0B Interrupts disabled 1B Interrupts enabled according to their enable bits EX1 2 rw Enable external interrupts from PP7 0B Interrupts disabled 1B Interrupts enabled Data Sheet 69 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Field Bits Type Description ET0 1 rw Enable interrupts from Timer 0 Interrupts disabled 0B 1B Interrupts enabled according to their enable bits EX0 0 rw Enable external interrupts from PP9 0B Interrupts disabled 1B Interrupts enabled Interrupt Priority Register IP Interrupt Priority Register Offset Wakeup Value B8H 00H Reset Value 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Res PID PSPI PI2C PT1 PX1 PT0 PX0 rw rw rw rw rw rw rw Field Bits Res 7 PID 6 rw Priority level for extended interrupts Timer 2/3, LF Receiver, RF Encoder 0B Low priority High priority 1B PSPI 5 rw Priority level for SPI interrupts 0B Low priority 1B High priority PI2C 4 rw Priority level for I2C interrupts 0B Low priority High priority 1B PT1 3 rw Priority level for Timer 1 interrupts 0B Low priority 1B High priority PX1 2 rw Priority level for external interrupts from PP7 0B Low priority 1B High priority PT0 1 rw Priority level for Timer 0 interrupts 0B Low priority 1B High priority Data Sheet Type Description Reserved 70 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Field Bits Type Description PX0 0 rw Priority level for external interrupts from PP9 Low priority 0B 1B High priority Interrupt Request Flag Register for extended interrupts IRQFR Interrupt Request Flag Register for extended interrupts 7 Offset Wakeup Value 8FH 00H 4 Res 00H 3 2 1 0 IRQRFE IRQFLF IRQFT3 IRQFT2 rc rc rc rc Field Bits Res 7:4 IRQRFE 3 rc Interrupt Request Flag RF Encoder 0B No interrupt occurred or flag cleared by readout 1B RF Encoder interrupt occurred IRQFLF 2 rc Interrupt Request Flag LF Receiver 0B No interrupt occurred or flag cleared by readout LF Receiver interrupt occurred 1B IRQFT3 1 rc Interrupt Request Flag Timer 3 0B No interrupt occurred or flag cleared by readout 1B Timer 3 interrupt occurred IRQFT2 0 rc Interrupt Request Flag Timer 2 0B No interrupt occurred or flag cleared by readout Timer 2 interrupt occurred 1B Data Sheet Type Reset Value Description Reserved 71 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.9 RF Transmitter The RF Transmitter consists of a PLL Frequency Synthesizer that is contained fully on chip, a Lock Detector, and a Power Amplifier. SFR RFC.0 EnPA SFR RFTX.1-0 PAOP 1-0 SFR RFTX.6 ITXD ASK- SFR RFENC SFR RFD SFR RFS Manchester/ BiPhase Encoder PA L Transmit data O G I C FSK- SFR RFTX.5 ASKFSK Transmit data 315 434 868 915 MHz MHz MHz MHz Transmit data SFR RFC ENFSYN PLL VCO 1890 MHz 1736 MHz 1736 MHz 1830 MHz Divider ÷2 Divider Chain SFR RFTX.3-2 ISMB1-0 0 - 315 MHz 1 - 434 MHz 2 - 868 MHz 3 - 915 MHz CDCC DCC 00 - 44% 01 - 39% 10 - 34% 11 - 27% CP Loop Filter Phase Detector FSK-MOD Crystal PLL Lock Detector Figure 14 RF Transmitter Block Diagram The RF Transmitter can be configured for the 315/434/868/915 MHz ISM-Band frequencies by setting SFR bits RFTX.3-2 [ISMB1-0] and choosing the proper crystal. Manchester/BiPhase/NRZ coded data with a bit rate up to 32 kbit/s (64 kchips/s) for the temperature range -40°C to +85°C and 20 kbit/s (40 kchips/s) for temperatures above +85°C can be transmitted using ASK or FSK modulation. The PLL Synthesizer and the Power Amplifier can be enabled separately by using the SFR RFC control register. The Power Amplifier should be switched on with a delay of at least 100 µs after enabling the Frequency Synthesizer. This delay is needed for PLL locking. 2.9.1 Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) The PLL consists of an on-chip VCO, an asynchronous divider chain with selectable overall division ratio, a phase detector with charge pump, and an internal loop filter. (see RF Frequency Synthesizer PLL Configuration on page 80) Data Sheet 72 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description The PLL can be enabled manually by setting SFR bit RFC.1 [ENFSYN]. The PLL lock frequency is determined by the crystal used (see Figure 10 “Formulas for Crystal selection dependent of RF Bands” on Page 53) and the appropriate configuration in the SFR bits RFTX.3-2 [ISMB1-0]. 2.9.2 Voltage-Controlled Oscillator (VCO) 16 frequency tuning curves are available to tune the VCO. The Library Function VCOTuning() can be used to select the appropriate tuning curve for the VCO depending on environmental conditions (temperature, VBat) and to enable the PLL (please refer to [1]). Selection of the tuning curve can also be done using RFVCO.3-0 [VCOF3-0]. This is done automatically by the Reset Handler after power up or a system reset by using the PLL Lock Detector and the PLL lock-detection routine. Additionally, the PLL Lock Detector for VCO tuning curve selection may be used by the user program code before RF data transmission. Note: Recalibration of the tuning curve is typically necessary when the supply voltage changes by more than 800 mV or the temperature changes by more than 70 degrees. 2.9.3 Power Amplifier (PA) The highly efficient Power Amplifier is enabled automatically if a byte is transmitted (RFS.1 [RFSE] is set to 0B). Alternatively, the Power Amplifier is enabled immediately by using RFC.0 [ENPA]. RFENC.3 [TXDD] is used to define the quiescent state (symbol that is sent when no data is available in RFD). The nominal transmit power levels are +5/8/10 dBm into a 50 Ω load at a supply voltage of 3.0 V. The Power Amplifier operating point must be optimized to the output power +5/8/10 dBm regarding current consumption by properly setting the RFTX.1-0 [PAOP1-0], RFFSPLL.3-2 [DCC1-0] and using an optimal-sized matching circuit. The Power Amplifier should be enabled at least 100 µs after enabling the RF Frequency Synthesizer because of the PLL lock-in time. 2.9.4 ASK Modulator ASK modulation is done by turning on and off the Power Amplifier, depending on the baseband data to be transmitted (On/Off-Keying) by using RFENC.3 [TXDD] or the Manchester/Biphase Encoder (see also Manchester/BiPhase Encoder with Bit Rate Generator). For information about FSK modulation, please see Crystal Oscillator. Data Sheet 73 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.9.5 Manchester/BiPhase Encoder with Bit Rate Generator A Manchester/BiPhase encoder controlled by the CPU is available as source for the RF Transmitter. The encoding bit rate can be set with Timer 3 (see Chapter 2.14.2.3). The application software needs to configure the timer and can subsequently send the raw uncoded data to the Manchester/BiPhase Encoder which takes care about encoding and the RF transmission itself (controlling the Power Amplifier). Using the hardware encoder allows the CPU to be operated at a reduced clock rate thereby reducing the peak current consumption during RF transmission. The reduced CPU clock rate also reduces the possibility of clock noise artifacts in the RF signal (see Chapter 2.5.1). Furthermore, the encoder creates a resume event after sending each byte therefore the application can enter IDLE state while sending each databyte (see Chapter 2.1.2.3). It is recommended to use both reduced clock rate and IDLE mode for best performance during RF transmission. A library function is available for comfortable configuration of the Manchester/BiPhase Encoder. Timer3 Bitrate Strobe RFENC.RFMODE RFENC.RFDLEN MSB Raw Data Shift Reg Buffer SFR RFD Bit Encoder Encoder Output Mod RFENC.TXDD RFS.RFBF RFS.RFSE PA Control Logic Shift Reg Empty RF Manchester/Bi-Phase Encoder (simplified view ) RF PA Enable RFC.ENPA RFTX.ASKFSK Figure 15 Manchester/BiPhase Encoder For a transmission using Manchester, BiPhase or Chip coding data is written to SFR RFD. The Manchester/BiPhase Encoder automatically enables the Power Amplifier when a new data byte is written to SFR RFD and disables the Power Amplifier after transmitting the last data bit automatically as well. The encoding selection can be changed every time before a data byte is written to the SFR RFD by adjusting SFR bits RFENC.2-0 [RFMode2-0]. The Chip coding mode (SFR bits RFENC.2-0 [RFMode2-0] = 101b) can be used to send data with a user-defined encoding scheme, e.g. for sending a preamble. The Chip mode sends each bit without encoding, but at twice the data rate. For full flexibility in terms of timing and protocol the RF PA can be controlled without using the Bit Encoder. If the shift register is empty, the data value defined by SFR bit RFENC.3 [TXDD] is assigned to the Encoder Output after the RF PA has been enabled by setting SFR bit RFC.1 [ENFSYN] and SFR bit RFC.0 [EnPA]. If any byte is written into SFR RFD the Bit Encoder takes over control of the RF PA until the last bit has been transmitted and the shift register is empty again. The RF Encoder Output can be connected to PP2, if enabled via CFG1.4[RfTXPEn]. When this alternate port functionality is enabled, the SFR bit RFC.1 [ENFSYN] and SFR bit RFC.0 [EnPA] must be set in order to allow the RF Encoder output to properly modulate the RF PA. Note: The Power Amplifier should be switched on using SFR bit RFC.0 [EnPA] with a delay of at least 100 µs after enabling the Frequency Synthesizer using SFR bit RFC.1 [ENFSYN] . This delay is needed for PLL locking. Data Sheet 74 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description The following figure shows the different timing diagrams for the various encoding schemes: 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 Data Clock Manchester Encoder- Mode (Manchester/BiPhase) Inverted Manchester Differential Manchester Biphase-0 Biphase-1 1 0 10 0 1 1 0 SFR RFD Clock Chip Mode Chip time Start of data transmission Transmission finished in Encoder-Mode Transmission finished in Chip-Mode Figure 16 Data Sheet Diagram of the Different RF Encoder Modes 75 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Timer 3 (see Chapter 2.14.2.3) provides the bit rate clock and has to be set according to the desired bit rate. The bit rate timer value can be calculated with the following formula: Timer value = Figure 17 fTimer clock source [Hz ] −1 ⎡ 1⎤ 8 ⋅ Bitrate ⎢ ⎥ ⎣s ⎦ Calculation of RF bit rate timer value Timer 3 has to be configured properly using timer registers (see Registers TL2, TH2, TL3, TH3, TMOD2, TCON2). The SFR RFS represents the status of the RF Encoder. After writing a data byte to SFR RFD, the SFR bit RFS.0 [RFBF] is set. It is cleared automatically when the data byte in SFR RFD is transferred to the shift register. The application should poll SFR bit RFS.0 [RFBF] to determine when the data is transferred to the shift register and SFR RFD can take the next data byte for processing. It is necessary to provide the transmitter with a continuous data stream. If no data is available, the transmitter falls back to quiescent state (see SFR bit RFENC.3 [TXDD]), if the Power Amplifier has been enabled by SFR bit RFC.1 [ENFSYN] and SFR bit RFC.0 [EnPA], otherwise the Power Amplifier is turned off automatically. SFR bit RFS.1 [RFSE] is set when the last data bit has been transmitted. If this bit is set, the Power Amplifier and the PLL can be disabled. If there are any data in the shift register this bit is cleared. 2.9.6 Register Description Table 16 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Page Number RFD RF Encoder TX Data Register 8EH 00H 77 RFTX RF Transmitter Configuration Register AEH UUUUUUUUB 82 RFFSPLL RF Frequency Synthesizer PLL Configuration D7H 82H RFVCO RF Frequency Synthesizer VCO Configuration DEH UUUUUUUUB 83 RFFSLD RF Frequency Synthesizer Lock Detector Configuration DFH 000UUUUUB 79 RFS RF Encoder Tx Status Register E6H 02H 81 RFENC RF Encoder Tx Control Register E7H E0H 78 RFC RF Transmitter Control Register EEH 00H 77 Data Sheet 76 80 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description RF Transmitter Control Register RFC RF Transmitter Control Register Offset Wakeup Value EEH 00H 7 00H 2 Res Field Bits Type Res 7:2 ENFSYN 1 rw Enable RF Frequency Synthesizer 0B RF Frequency Synthesizer disabled 1B RF Frequency Synthesizer enabled EnPA 0 rw Enable RF Power Amplifier 0B RF Power Amplifier disabled 1B RF Power Amplifier enabled Reset Value 1 0 ENFSYN EnPA rw rw Description Reserved RF Encoder TX Data Register By writing a data byte to the SFR RFD, the data transmission is invoked automatically. By default, the transmission takes place byte-aligned. If fewer than 8 bits are to be transmitted, SFR bits RFENC.7-5 [RFDLen2-0] can be set to determine the number of bits that should be transmitted with MSB first. In this case the unused LSBs are disregarded. RFD RF Encoder TX Data Register Offset Wakeup Value 8EH 00H 7 Reset Value 00H 0 RFD w Field Bits Type Description RFD 7:0 w RF Encoder TX Data Register Data Sheet 77 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description RF Encoder Tx Control Register RFENC RF Encoder Tx Control Register 7 5 Offset Wakeup Value E7H E0H Reset Value E0H 4 3 2 0 RFDLen RFMASK TXDD RFDMode rw rw rw rw Field Bits Type Description RFDLen 7:5 rw RF Data Length Number of bits to be transmitted from SFR RFD with MSB first. If fewer than 8 bits are transmitted, the unused LSBs are disregarded. 000B 1 bit 001B 2 bits 010B 3 bits 011B 4 bits 100B 5 bits 101B 6 bits 110B 7 bits 111B 8 bits RFMASK 4 rw RF Interrupt Mask Flag 0B Interrupt enabled Interrupt disabled (masked) 1B TXDD 3 rw Transmit data If SFR bit RFC.1-0 [ENFSYN-EnPA] is set. Defines quiescent state on RF TX. Symbol that is sent when no data is available in RFD. 0B RF TX transmits symbol for 0B 1B RF TX transmits symbol for 1B RFDMode 2:0 rw RF Encoder Mode A diagram of the different RF Encoder Modes can be found in Figure 16. 000B Manchester 001B Inverted Manchester 010B Differential Manchester 011B BiPhase-0 100B BiPhase-1 101B Chips: Data bits are interpreted as chips 110B Reserved 111B Reserved Data Sheet 78 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description RF Frequency Synthesizer Lock Detector Configuration RFFSLD Offset Wakeup Value DFH 000UUUUUB RF Frequency Synthesizer Lock Detector Configuration 7 6 Res 5 4 NOLOCK ENLOCKD ET LL rc w w 08H 3 0 Field Bits Res 7:6 NOLOCK 5 rc PLL Lock Indicator 0B PLL has locked or bit cleared by read out 1B PLL has not locked while ENLOCKDET=1B ENLOCKDET 4 w Enable Lock Detector 0B Lock Detector disabled 1B Lock Detector enabled LL 3:0 w Lock Limit Selection Sets the number of phase synchronization violation. LL3-0 count value is reset to zero when the ENLOCKDET bit is reset. 0000B First violation will trigger NOLOCK 0001B Second violation will trigger NOLOCK ... 1110B 15th violation will trigger NOLOCK 1111B 16th violation will trigger NOLOCK Data Sheet Type Reset Value Description Reserved 79 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description RF Frequency Synthesizer PLL Configuration RFFSPLL RF Frequency Synthesizer PLL Configuration 5 Offset Wakeup Value D7H 82H 4 3 2 Reset Value 82H 7 6 1 0 FPDPOL DDCC ABLP DCC CPCU w w w w w Field Bits Type Description FPDPOL 7 w Frequency-Phase-Detector polarity Must be 1B DDCC 6 w Disable RF divider duty cycle control 0B RF divider duty cycle control enabled 1B RF divider duty cycle control disabled ABLP 5:4 w Antibacklash pulse width selection 00D 1.2ns (default value, do not change) DCC 3:2 w RF divider duty cycle control (high/low ratio) The RF divider duty cycle control can be used to increase the Power Amplifier output power at low supply voltages. 00B 44% 01B 39% 10B 34% 11B 27% CPCU 1:0 w Charge pump current selection 10B 20µA (default value, do not change) Data Sheet 80 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description RF Encoder Tx Status Register RFS RF Encoder Tx Status Register Offset Wakeup Value E6H 02H 7 2 Res 02H 1 0 RFSE RFBF r r Field Bits Res 7:2 RFSE 1 r RF Encoder Shift Register Empty This bit is automatically set by hardware if no further bits are available in the shift register. 0B RF Encoder shift register is not empty 1B RF Encoder shift register is empty RFBF 0 r RF Encoder Buffer Full This bit is automatically set by hardware on write access to register RFD or cleared if data in register RFD is transferred to shift register respectively. 0B RF Encoder buffer empty 1B RF Encoder buffer full Data Sheet Type Reset Value Description Reserved 81 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description RF Transmitter Configuration Register RFTX RF Transmitter Configuration Register 7 6 5 4 XCapSH INVTXDA T ASKFSK Res w w w Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value AEH UUUUUUUUB 07H 3 2 1 0 ISMB PAOP w w Field Bits Type Description XCapSH 7 w Enable XCAP short More information about this bit can be found in Chapter 2.5.4. 0B XCAP short disabled 1B XCAP short enabled INVTXDAT 6 w Invert TX Data 0B TX data not inverted 1B TX data inverted ASKFSK 5 w TX Mode 0B FSK 1B ASK Res 4 ISMB 3:2 w RF Frequency Select ISMB 00B 315MHz frequency range 01B 434MHz frequency range 10B 868MHz frequency range 11B 915MHz frequency range PAOP 1:0 w RF Power Amplifier Output Power Selection 00B 5dBm 01B 8dBm 10B 8dBm 11B 10dBm Data Sheet Reserved 82 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description RF Frequency Synthesizer VCO Configuration RFVCO RF Frequency Synthesizer VCO Configuration 7 Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value DEH UUUUUUUUB 90H 4 3 VCOCC VCOF rw rw Field Bits Type Description VCOCC 7:4 rw VCO Core Current Selection 0000B 0µA 0001B 200µA 0010B 400µA 0011B 600µA 0100B 800µA 0101B 1000µA 0110B 1200µA 0111B 1400µA 1000B 1600µA 1001B 1800µA 1010B 2000µA 1011B 2200µA 1100B 2400µA 1101B 2600µA 1110B 2800µA 1111B 3000µA VCOF 3:0 rw VCO Tuning Curve Selection 0000B Tuning Curve 0 0001B Tuning Curve 0 ... 1110B Tuning Curve 14 1111B Tuning Curve 15 Data Sheet 0 83 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.10 LF Receiver LFOOT LFRXC.ENOOTIM LFOOTP LF Receiver On/Off Timer LFSYNCFG.LFCDA LFRXS.CDRAW Wakeup to Systemcontroller WUF.LFCD LF Receiver & LFRXC.ENLFRX LF RX Analog Front End AFE LF-Antenna LF Carrier Detector xLF LF Data LF Baseband Processor LFRXD Wakeup to Systemcontroller WUF.LFPM1 LF Data Recovery (Chip Level) Manchester / BiPhase Decoder Synchronizer Wakeup to Systemcontroller WUF.LFPM0 Baudrate Generator LFRXS.LFDATA Wakeup to Systemcontroller WUF.LFSY LFRXS.LFRAW Figure 18 LF Receiver The LF Receiver is used for wireless data transmission towards the PMA5110 and for waking up the device from POWER DOWN state. It can generate a wake-up directly by the Carrier Detector if the carrier amplitude is above a preset threshold, or it can decode the received data and not wake up the microcontroller until a predefined sync match pattern or wakeup pattern is detected in the data stream. Data recovery using a synchronizer and a decoder is available for Manchester and BiPhase coded data. The synchronizer can also handle Manchester/BiPhase code violations. Any other coding scheme can be handled directly by the microcontroller on the chip level without using the decoder. An LF On/Off Timer is implemented to generate periodic on/off switching of the LF Receiver in the POWER DOWN state. This can be done to reduce the current consumption. 2.10.1 LF Receiver Analog Front End Configuration The LF Receiver Analog Front End (AFE) consists of an input attenuator with an Automatic Gain Control (AGC), an amplifier with selectable gain, an ASK demodulator, a Data Filter and Data Slicer with adjustable filter bandwidth for different data rate. Additionally, a Carrier Detector with adjustable threshold is implemented. A LF Carrier Detector Filter can be enabled to avoid wake-up by interferers. Data Sheet 84 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF RX Analog Frond End AFE SFR LFRXM LFHT<1:0> Carrier detector LFCCDET<2:0> LFENCDCAL LFENFCTC SFR LFRX1 AGCTCD SFR LFRXC DISAGC SFR LFRX0 CDETT LFCD SFR WUF VCTth r LF xLF Attenuator AGC LF-Antenna Amplifier ASK DeModulator Data Filter Data Slicer To LF Baseband LFRAW DF<3:0> DSTFC<1:0> SFR LFRXS SFR LFRX1 SFR LFRX1 AGC SFR LFRX0 ATR<1:0> VAttnThr Figure 19 LF Receiver AFE Block Diagram 2.10.1.1 Attenuator (AGC) and Data Filter / Data Slicer An input attenuator is provided to limit strong signals and interferers across the differential input. The attenuator detects the receiver input level and acts as an automatic gain control block (fast attack, slow decay). The attenuator decay slew rate can be adjusted by changing the decay slew rate using SFR bits LFRX1.76 [AGCTCD1-0]. LF-RX Timing AGC attack time AGC decay time TAGCATT TAGCDEC LF-Signal Datagram Figure 20 Preamble Datagram LF Receiver AFE Block Diagram SFR LFRX1 is as well used to configure the data slicer and data filter according to the desired bit rate. 2.10.1.2 LF Carrier Detector A level-detection circuit is implemented to determine if the carrier amplitude is above a predetermined level. This can be used to wake up the PMA5110 from the POWER DOWN state by an externally applied LF signal. In the POWER DOWN state, the LF Carrier Detector can either: • • Generate a wake-up and enter the RUN state as soon as an LF carrier is detected (SFR bit WUF.5 [LFCD] = 1B) Enable the LF baseband and the 12 MHz RC HF oscillator in the POWER DOWN state to process the incoming LF signal by looking for a sync match or pattern match (SFR bits WUF.2,3 or 4 = 1B). If a sync match or pattern match is received, the system controller generates a wake-up and enters the RUN state for further data processing. Note: In both cases the overall LF sensitivity is determined by the LF Carrier Detector, since it determines if the LF baseband is enabled or disabled. Data Sheet 85 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Since the LF-Signal is ASK modulated a carrier detect hold time is specified to prolong the carrier detect signal. A minimum hold time must be set depending on the data rate using LFCDM.1-0 [LFHT1-0] ( The hold time functionality is illustrated in the following figure. LF-Signal Datagram Preamble Datagram Carrier detector Hold Time TCDHD Carrier detector with Hold Time Carrier detector Output Figure 21 2.10.1.2.1 LF Receiver Carrier Detector Hold Time Behavior Carrier Detector Threshold Calibration To achieve high sensitivity, the Carrier Detector has to be calibrated to compensate for possible system noise and production spread. This calibration is enabled by setting SFR bit LFCDM.3 [LFENCDCAL] and is executed every time the LF Receiver is switched on (either manually by SFR bit LFRXC.2 [ENLFRX] or automatically by the LF On/Off Timer). Since this is done during the settling time of the LF Receiver, no extra delay is required for this calibration. The Carrier Detector Threshold Level which is used for this calibration can be set by SFR bits LFRX0.7-4[CDETT]. Attention: To stabilize the specified sensitivity SLF1 (please refer to Table 38), the Library function LFSensitivityCalibration() has to be used (please refer to [1]). If set, SFR bit LFCDM.2 [LFENFCTC] “freezes” the calibrated threshold level. If this bit is not set, the threshold will follow the mean value of the input signal, resulting in a threshold signal that is dependent on the LF signal strength and length. If SFR bit LFCDM.2 [LFENFCTC] is set, a periodic recalibration is required, especially at higher temperatures since the “frozen” threshold level might drift after the Carrier Detector Freeze Hold Time (TCDCFH). The recalibration is achieved automatically by the next off/on transition of the LF On/Off Timer or by disabling/enabling the LF Receiver manually by SFR bit LFRXC.2 [ENLFRX]. Note: If the LF Receiver is disabled/enabled manually at least one 2 kHz RC LP oscillator period has to be wait between off and on transition to achieve the automatic recalibration. The following figure shows the timing behavior of the calibration. Data Sheet 86 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF RX Enable Bit or ON/OFF-Timer LF-RX Timing LF-RX OFF LF-RX ON LF-RX Settling Time TSET = max. 2ms LF-Signal Datagram LF-CD Calibration Preamble Datagram LF-CD Threshold Calibration Freeze hold time (TCDCFH) Freeze calibration threshold Carrier detector with Hold Time Carrier detector threshold and LF Data signal Carrier detector output Figure 22 2.10.1.2.2 Carrier Detector Threshold Calibration Timing (with “freeze”) Carrier Detector Filtering To prevent the device from undesired carrier-detect wake-ups and to prevent the LF baseband and 12 MHz RC HF oscillator from being enabled due to interference, an LF Carrier Detector Filter is implemented. SFR LFCDFlt is used to determine the filtering mode and the filtering time. Three LF Carrier Detector filtering operation modes are available: • • • LFCDFlt.1-0 [CDFM] = 00B The LF Carrier Detector Filter is switched off so the wake-up functionality will remain without any filtering LFCDFlt.1-0 [CDFM] = 10B The LF Carrier Detector Filter is always active - This mode is suitable for applications that use a carrier wakeup without any data transmission LFCDFlt.1-0 [CDFM] = 01B The LF Carrier Detector Filter is deactivated when an ON pulse is received. The Preamble must contain an ON pulse (LF carrier active) longer than the selected filter time to enable the LF baseband and the 12 MHz RC HF oscillator. After the ON-pulse is received, the filter is disabled for data receiving until no more data is received. Depending on the selected hold time (SFR bits LFCDM.1-0 [LFHT1-0]), the filter will be reenabled after the last received bit. The following figure shows the behavior of the various modes. Data Sheet 87 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF-RX ON LF-Signal Datagram Preamble Datagram Carrier Detector Output (CDFM=00b) HT HT LF Baseband / 12MHz RC activity FT FT FT FT FT Carrier Detector Output (CDFM=10b) HT HT HT HT LF Baseband / 12MHz RC activity FT FT Carrier Detector Output (CDFM=01b) HT HT LF Baseband / 12MHz RC activity FT: Filtering Time (determined by SFR Bit LFCDFLT.1-0[CDFT1-0]) HT: Hold Time (determined by SFR Bit LFCDM.1-0[LFHT1-0]) Figure 23 LF Receiver Carrier Detector Filtering 2.10.2 LF Receiver On/Off Timer An On/Off Timer is implemented to reduce the LF Receiver current consumption in POWER DOWN state. It can be enabled by SFR bit LFRXC.3 [ENOOTIM]. The LF Receiver Analog Frontend will be periodically switched on or off corresponding to the timer settings. The current state of the LF Receiver (on or off) is available in SFR bit LFSYNCFG.7[LFCDA]. The LF Receiver On/Off Timer incorporates a precounter (SFR LFOOTP) as time base and a post counter for independently setting the On time and the Off time (SFR LFOOT). 2.10.2.1 LF Receiver On/Off Timer Calibration The calibration process is done automatically by a Library function (see [1]). The time base is automatically calibrated to 50 ms by this function. If another (uncalibrated) time base is needed, SFR LFOOTP can be configured manually by using the equation shown in Figure 24. timebase [s ]= Figure 24 Data Sheet LFOOTP + 1 f2 kHz RC LP Oscillator [Hz] Calculation of time base for LF Receiver On/Off Timer 88 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description The On time and the Off time can be configured individually using SFR LFOOT. They can be calculated using the equations shown in Figure 25 and Figure 26. ontime [s ] = (ONTIM + 1)⋅ ⎛⎜⎜ Integer ⎛⎜ LFOOTP ⎞⎟ + 1⎞⎟⎟ (ONTIM + 1)⋅ ⎛⎜⎜ Integer ⎛⎜ LFOOTP ⎞⎟ + 1⎞⎟⎟ ⋅ timebase [s ] 4 ⎝ ⎝ f2 kHz RC LP Oscillator [Hz ] Figure 25 offtime [s ] = ⎠ ⎠= ⎝ 4 ⎠ ⎝ LFOOTP + 1 ⎠ Calculation of On time for LF Receiver On/Off Timer (OFFTIM + 1)⋅ ( LFOOTP + 1) ⋅ 4 = (OFFTIM + 1)⋅ timebase [s ]⋅ 4 f2kHz RC LP Oscillator [Hz] Figure 26 Data Sheet Calculation of Off time for LF Receiver On/Off Timer 89 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.10.3 LF Receiver Baseband Processor LFSYNCFG.SYNM LFRXC.LFBBM Wakeup to Systemcontroller WUF.LFSY LFRXS.DECERR LF Baseband Processor LFPCFG LFRXC.CSEL LFRXC .IRXD LF Datarecovery (Chipmode) Manchester / BiPhase Decoder 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 PATTERN MATCH Comparator Pattern 0 0 Wakeup to Systemcontroller WUF.LFPM0 Synchronizer SYNC MATCH Comparator LF Receiver Analog Frontend LFP0H LFP0L Pattern 1 LFP1H LFSYNCFG.SPSL LFSYN0 LFSYN1 LFSYNCFG.LFSYN 17-16 LFP1L Data Interface 1Bit Serial Data Buffer Bitrate Generator LFDIV1 Wakeup to Systemcontroller WUF.LFPM1 8Bit Data Buffer LFDIV0 LFRXS.LFBP LFRXS.LFDATA LFRXS.LFOV LFRXS.LFDP LFRXS.LFDOV LFRXD LFRXS.LFRAW Figure 27 LF Receiver Baseband The LF Receiver Baseband Processor ca n be configured to receive the following datagram formats by using the SFR bits LFSYNCFG.1-0 [SYNM1-0]. SYNM[1:0] 00 Preamble (min. 2ms) Manchester : 0/1 or 1/0 transition BiPhase : two identical chips 01 Preamble (min. 2ms) Sync pattern (4-18chips 10 Preamble (min. 2ms) Manchester : 0/1 or 1/0 transition BiPhase : two identical chips 11 Preamble (min. 2ms) Sync pattern (4-18chips Figure 28 LF Receiver Baseband Configurations 2.10.3.1 Synchronizer Data #1 Data #1 Data #n Data #n Wake-up pattern (4-16bits) Wake-up pattern (4-16bits) Data #1 Data #1 Data #n Data #n A sync pattern of up to 18 chips can be specified (SFR LFSYN1, SFR LFSYN0 and SFR bits LFSYNCFG.54 [LFSYN17-16]) and compared to the synchronized received bit stream. The comparison takes place before decoding, so sync patterns with code violations can also be detected. Code violations are defined to have at least three consecutive chips without level transitions. Note: The sync pattern should maintain a 50/50 ratio of LOW / HIGH chips to preserve a DC Level of 50% and must not contain more than 3 consecutive chips at the same level. Data Sheet 90 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.10.3.2 Bit rate Generator The SFR LFDIV1 and SFR LFDIV0 define the LF Receiver bit rate. Depending on the selected system clock, either the left or the right formula has to be used. ⎞ ⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟ fCrystal [Hz ] ⎜ LFDIV 1 / 0 = f12MHz RC HF Oscillator [Hz ] ⎟ or ⎜ LFDIV 1 / 0 = ⎟ ⎜ ⎡ 1⎤ ⎟ ⎜ ⎡ 1⎤ ⎟ 16 ⋅ baudrate ⎢ ⎥ ⎟ ⎜ 32 ⋅ baudrate ⎢ ⎥ ⎟ ⎜ ⎣s ⎦ ⎠ ⎝ ⎣s ⎦ ⎠ ⎝ Figure 29 Calculation of LF Receiver bit rate For sync match and pattern match, the bit rate generator is needed in POWER DOWN state. The only available system clock in POWER DOWN state is the 12 MHz RC HF oscillator. To avoid switching bit rates, the system clock should never be changed during LF reception is running. Due to the drift of the 12 MHz RC HF oscillator, a calibration mechanism is provided as a Library function and is described in [1]. This Library function automatically configures SFR LFDIV0 and SFR LFDIV1. 2.10.3.3 LF Data Decoder The decoder can be used for Manchester or BiPhase encoded data. If a code violation is detected SFR bit LFRXS.6 [DECERR] is set to 1B. Figure 30 shows a summary of the available coding schemes and the appropriate register settings. 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 Data Register Configuration LFRXC.CSEL LFRXC.IRXD Manchester 0 0 Inverted Manchester 0 1 BiPhase-0 1 0 BiPhase-1 1 1 Clock time Tbit1) 1) Duration of a Manchester / BiPhase coded bit Figure 30 LF Receiver Data Decoder schemes 2.10.3.4 Wake-up Pattern Detector Two different wake-up patterns with a length of 4, 8 or 18 bits can be stored by using SFRs LFP0H, LFP0L, LFP1H and LFP1L. SFR WUM determines on which pattern (pattern 0, pattern 1, or both) a wake-up occurs. 2.10.3.5 LF Receiver Data Interface The received data can be read by the microcontroller using the following different interfaces: • • 8 bit data byte (synchronized, Manchester/BiPhase decoded) Serial bit stream data (synchronized, Manchester/BiPhase decoded) Data Sheet 91 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description • • RAW data (synchronized, chip level) RAW Carrier Detect (not synchronized) 2.10.3.5.1 8 bit data byte Synchronized and decoded data bytes are received using SFR LFRXD. Decoded bits are shifted into an 8 bit receive buffer, until a byte boundary is reached. The received byte is then shifted into the SFR LFRXD, and a flag SFR bit LFRXS.3 [LFDP] is set, while the following byte starts shifting into the receive buffer. If the SFR LFRXD is not read before the following byte is received, it will be overwritten and an overflow flag SFR bit LFRXS.4 [LFDOV] is set. 2.10.3.5.2 Serial bit stream data Synchronized and decoded serial data is received in the SFR bit LFRXS.0 [LFDATA]. A flag SFR bit LFRXS.1 [LFBP] is set if data is pending, while the following bit is buffered. If the SFR bit LFRXS.0 [LFDATA] is not read before the following bit is received, it will be overwritten, and an overflow flag SFR bit LFRXS.2 [LFOV] is set. 2.10.3.5.3 RAW data Synchronized and not decoded serial data (on the chip level) can be read by the microcontroller using SFR bit LFRXS.5 [LFRAW]. This can be used for any coding scheme. 2.10.3.5.4 RAW Carrier Detect Not synchronized and not decoded serial data can be read by the microcontroller using SFR bit LFRXS.7 [CDRAW]. This indicates if a carrier signal is currently present (SFR bit LFRXS.7[CDRAW] = 1B) or not (SFR bit LFRXS.7 [CDRAW] = 0B). Data Sheet 92 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.10.4 Register Description Table 17 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Page Number LFRXS LF Receiver Status Register A4H 00H 105 LFRXD LF Receiver Data Register A5H 00H 104 LFSYN0 LF Sync Pattern 0 A6H UUUUUUUUB 106 LFSYN1 LF Sync Pattern 1 A7H UUUUUUUUB 106 LFSYNCFG LF SYNC Matching Configuration Register AFH X0UUUUUUB 107 LFCDFlt LF Carrier Detect Filtering B2H 00UU00UUB LFDIV0 LF Division Factor low byte B3H UUUUUUUUB 96 LFDIV1 LF Division Factor high byte B4H 00000UUUB LFCDM LF Carrier Detector Mode B5H UUUUUUUUB 95 LFRX1 LF Receiver Configuration Register 1 B6H UUUUU0UUB 102 LFRX0 LF Receiver Configuration Register 0 B7H UUUUUUUUB 101 LFP0L LF Pattern 0 Detector Sequence Data LSB BEH UUUUUUUUB 99 LFP0H LF Pattern 0 Detector Sequence Data MSB BFH UUUUUUUUB 98 LFOOTP LF On/Off Timer Precounter C5H UUUUUUUUB 98 LFOOT LF On/Off Timer Configuration Register C6H UUUUUUUUB 97 LFPCFG LF Pattern Detection Configuration Register C7H 00000UUUB LFP1L LF Pattern 1 Detector Sequence Data LSB CEH UUUUUUUUB 100 LFP1H LF Pattern 1 Detector Sequence Data MSB CFH UUUUUUUUB 99 LFRXC LF Receiver Control Register UUUUUUUUB 103 Data Sheet F9H 93 94 96 100 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF Carrier Detect Filtering LFCDFlt LF Carrier Detect Filtering 7 6 5 Res Offset Wakeup Value B2H 00UU00UUB 4 3 2 Res CDFT rw Field Bits Res 7:6 CDFT 5:4 Res 3:2 CDFM 1:0 Data Sheet Type Reset Value 00H 1 0 CDFM rw Description Reserved rw Carrier Detector Filtering Timer 00B Shortest filtering time 10B Short filtering time 11B Long filtering time 11B Longest filtering time Reserved rw Carrier Detector Filtering Mode Detailed information can be found in Chapter 2.10.1.2.2. 00B Filter disabled 01B Filter disabled after ON pulse received (re-enabled again 1-8ms after last bit is received, dependent on hold time determined by SFR bit LFCDM.1-0 [LFHT1-0] 10B Filter always active 11B Reserved 94 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF Carrier Detector Mode LFCDM LF Carrier Detector Mode 7 6 Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value B5H UUUUUUUUB 00H 4 3 2 1 0 LFOOEXT LFCCDET LFENCDC AL LFENFCT C LFHT rw rw rw rw rw Field Bits Type Description LFOOEXT 7 rw LF ON-time Extension on Carrier Detect 0B LF On/Off time is acting as configured in LFOOT on page 198LFOOT on page 97 and LFOOTP on page 98 1B LF On time is extended as long as a LF carrier, that exceeds the threshold, is present. LFCCDET 6:4 rw LF Calibrate Carrier Detect Threshold Selection Note: Must be set to 000B LFENCDCAL 3 rw LF Enable Carrier Detect Calibration 0B LF carrier detect calibration disabled 1B LF carrier detect calibration enabled LFENFCTC 2 rw LF Enable Calibration Threshold Freeze 0B LF calibration threshold freeze disabled 1B LF calibration threshold freeze enabled LFHT 1:0 rw LF Carrier Detector Hold Time Selection 00B 2x 2 kHz RC LP oscillator period (typ. 1 ms) 01B 4x 2 kHz RC LP oscillator period (typ. 2 ms) 10B 8x 2 kHz RC LP oscillator period (typ. 4 ms) 11B 16x 2 kHz RC LP oscillator period (typ. 8 ms) Data Sheet 95 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF Division Factor low byte LFDIV0 LF Division Factor low byte Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value B3H UUUUUUUUB 00H 7 0 LFD7_0 rw Field Bits Type Description LFD7_0 7:0 rw LF bit rate generator division factor bit 7 down to bit 0 LF Division Factor high byte LFDIV1 LF Division Factor high byte 7 Offset Wakeup Value B4H 00000UUUB 6 3 00H 2 Res LFDCEn Reset Value 0 LFD10_8 rcw rw Field Bits Type Description LFDCEn 7 rcw LF Division Calibration Enable Note: Under control of Library functions Res 6:3 LFD10_8 2:0 Reserved rw LF bit rate generator division factor bit 10 down to bit 8 Note: These SFRs can be modified manually as well for using other (uncalibrated) bit rates. Data Sheet 96 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF On/Off Timer Configuration Register LFOOT LF On/Off Timer Configuration Register 7 Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value C6H UUUUUUUUB 00H 4 3 0 OFFTIM ONTIM rw rw Field Bits Type Description OFFTIM 7:4 rw Off time (MSB-LSB) Binary weighted Off time. Example: If time base is set to 50ms in LFOOTP the following value range is available (please refer to Figure 26 “Calculation of Off time for LF Receiver On/Off Timer” on Page 89): 0000B 200ms ... 1111B 3.2s ONTIM 3:0 rw On time (MSB-LSB) Binary weighted On time. Example: If time base is set to 50ms in LFOOTP the following value range is available (please refer to Figure 25 “Calculation of On time for LF Receiver On/Off Timer” on Page 89): 0000B 12.5ms ... 1111B 200ms Data Sheet 97 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF On/Off Timer Precounter LFOOTP LF On/Off Timer Precounter Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value C5H UUUUUUUUB 64H 7 0 LFOOTP rw Field Bits Type Description LFOOTP 7:0 rw LF Receiver On/Off Timer Precounter setting LF Pattern 0 Detector Sequence Data MSB LFP0H LF Pattern 0 Detector Sequence Data MSB Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value BFH UUUUUUUUB FFH 7 0 LFCODEP015_8 rw Field Bits LFCODEP015_8 7:0 Data Sheet Type Description rw Code pattern 0 sequence bit 15 down to bit 8 98 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF Pattern 0 Detector Sequence Data LSB LFP0L LF Pattern 0 Detector Sequence Data LSB Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value BEH UUUUUUUUB FFH 7 0 LFCODEP07_0 rw Field Bits LFCODEP07_0 7:0 Type Description rw Code pattern 0 sequence bit 7 down to bit 0 LF Pattern 1 Detector Sequence Data MSB LFP1H LF Pattern 1 Detector Sequence Data MSB Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value CFH UUUUUUUUB FFH 7 0 LFCODEP115_8 rw Field Bits LFCODEP115_8 7:0 Data Sheet Type Description rw Code pattern 1 sequence bit 15 down to bit 8 99 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF Pattern 1 Detector Sequence Data LSB LFP1L LF Pattern 1 Detector Sequence Data LSB Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value CEH UUUUUUUUB FFH 7 0 LFCODEP17_0 rw Field Bits LFCODEP17_0 7:0 Type Description rw Code pattern 1 sequence bit 7 down to bit 0 LF Pattern Detection Configuration Register LFPCFG LF Pattern Detection Configuration Register Offset Wakeup Value C7H 00000UUUB 7 3 Res 00H 1 0 PSL PSEL rw rw Field Bits Res 7:3 PSL 2:1 rw Pattern sequence length (MSB-LSB) 00B 4 bit pattern length (LFP0L.[3:0] or LFP1L.[3:0] 01B 8 bit pattern length (LFP0L.[7:0] or LFP1L.[7:0]) 10B 16 bit pattern length (LFP1H.[15:8] / LFP1L.[7:0] or LFP0H.[15:8] / LFP0L.[7:0]) 11B Reserved PSEL 0 rw Pattern select 0B Only wake-up pattern 0 (LFP0L and LFP0H) can generate a pattern match wake-up. 1B Both, wake-up pattern 0 (LFP0L and LFP0H) and wake-up pattern 1 (LFP1L and LFP1H) can generate a pattern match wake-up. Data Sheet Type 2 Reset Value Description Reserved 100 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF Receiver Configuration Register 0 The SFR LFRX0 determines the attenuation of the LF input signal (SFR bit LFRX0.0 [VDIV1-0]) and the threshold for the Carrier Detector (SFR bits LFRX0.7-4 [CDETT3-0]). Please refer to Product Characteristics for proper setting of these bits. LFRX0 LF Receiver Configuration Register 0 7 Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value B7H UUUUUUUUB 39H 4 3 2 1 0 CDETT ATR VDIV rw rw rw Field Bits Type Description CDETT 7:4 rw Carrier Detector Threshold Level Selection Use PMA Library function LFSensitivityCalibration() to automatically configure these bits. Please refer to [1]. ATR 3:2 rw Attenuator Threshold Selection Note: Must be set to 10B VDIV Data Sheet 1:0 rw Antenna Voltage Divider Factor Selection 00B Divided by 9 01B Divided by 1 10B Divided by 29 11B Reserved 101 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF Receiver Configuration Register 1 LFRX1 LF Receiver Configuration Register 1 7 6 5 Offset Wakeup Value B6H UUUUU0UUB 4 3 2 Res AGCTCD DSTFC LFGAIN rw rw rw Reset Value 31H 1 0 DF rw Field Bits Type Description AGCTCD 7:6 rw AGC Time Constant Decay Slew Rate Selection Note: Must be set to 00B DSTFC 5:4 rw Data Slicer Threshold Filter Corner Frequency Selection Note: Must be set to 00B LFGAIN 3 rw LF Receiver Front End Gain Select Note: Must be set to 1B Res 2 DF 1:0 Data Sheet Reserved rw Data Filter Corner Frequency Selection 00B Reserved 01B Recommended for a data rate of 2000/3900/4000 bit/s 10B Reserved 11B Reserved 102 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF Receiver Control Register LFRXC LF Receiver Control Register 7 6 CDRECAL DISAGC rw rw 5 Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value F9H UUUUUUUUB 00H 4 3 2 1 0 LFBBM ENOOTIM ENLFRX IRXD CSEL rw rw rw rw rw Field Bits Type Description CDRECAL 7 rw Carrier Detector Threshold re-calibration Note: This bit must be set to 0B DISAGC 6 rw Disable Automatic Gain Control (AGC) 0B AGC is enabled 1B AGC is disabled LFBBM 5:4 rw LF Baseband Processor Mode Selection 00B Disabled: The entire digital part of the receiver is disabled. The LF Analog Frontend including Carrier Detector is still active (if enabled by ENLFRX) 01B Raw data recovery: The digital frontend and the synchronizer are active. Data is recovered at chip level and can be handled by the microcontroller. This mode can be used for the implementation of custom coding and synchronization schemes. 10B Raw/decoded data recovery: The full LF baseband functionality including the decoding of Manchester/BiPhase coded data is available. 11B Reserved ENOOTIM 3 rw Enable On/Off Timer 0B LF Receiver is always on (if also enabled by ENLFRX) 1B LF Receiver is controlled by On/Off Timer (if also enabled by ENLFRX) ENLFRX 2 rw Enable LF Receiver 0B LF Receiver disabled 1B LF Receiver enabled (Controlled by ENOOTIM) IRXD 1 rw Invert LF Receiver data 0B Data not inverted 1B Data inverted Data Sheet 103 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Field Bits Type Description CSEL 0 rw Decoder Code Select IRXD=0B 0B Manchester coded data 1B BiPhase 0 coded data IRXD=1B 0B Inverted Manchester coded data 1B BiPhase 1 coded data LF Receiver Data Register LFRXD LF Receiver Data Register Offset Wakeup Value A5H 00H 7 Reset Value 00H 0 LFRXD r Field Bits Type Description LFRXD 7:0 r LF Receiver data register Data Sheet 104 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF Receiver Status Register LFRXS LF Receiver Status Register Offset Wakeup Value A4H 00H Reset Value 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CDRAW DECERR LFRAW LFDOV LFDP LFOV LFBP LFDATA r rc r rc rc rc rc r Field Bits Type Description CDRAW 7 r LF Carrier detect raw data DECERR 6 rc Manchester/Biphase decode error 0B No error detected 1B Decode error detected LFRAW 5 r LF Receiver raw data LFDOV 4 rc LF data byte overwritten 0B No error detected 1B LF data byte overwritten LFDP 3 rc LF data byte pending If this bit is set LF data can be read from LFRXD LFOV 2 rc LF serial decoded data overwritten 0B No error detected 1B LF serial decoded data overwritten LFBP 1 rc LF serial decoded data pending If this bit is set new LF serial decoded data is available at LFDATA since the last read access to LFRXS LFDATA 0 r LF serial decoded data Data Sheet 105 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF Sync Pattern 0 LFSYN0 LF Sync Pattern 0 Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value A6H UUUUUUUUB FFH 7 0 LFSYN7_0 rw Field Bits Type Description LFSYN7_0 7:0 rw LF Sync Pattern Chip 7 - Chip 0 LF Sync Pattern 1 LFSYN1 LF Sync Pattern 1 Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value A7H UUUUUUUUB FFH 7 0 LFSYN15_8 rw Field Bits Type Description LFSYN15_8 7:0 rw LF Sync Pattern Chip 15 - Chip 8 Data Sheet 106 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description LF SYNC Matching Configuration Register LFSYNCFG LF SYNC Matching Configuration Register Offset Wakeup Value AFH X0UUUUUUB 2 38H 7 6 5 4 LFCDA Res LFSYN17 LFSYN16 SPSL SYNM rw rw rw rw r 3 Reset Value 1 0 Field Bits Type Description LFCDA 7 r LF Receiver On/Off indicator 0B LF Receiver is currently off 1B LF Receiver is currently on Res 6 LFSYN17 5 rw Sync pattern sequence chip 17 LFSYN16 4 rw Sync pattern sequence chip 16 SPSL 3:2 rw Sync pattern sequence length (MSB-LSB) 00B 4 chips sync pattern length (LFSYN0.[3:0]) 01B 8 chips sync pattern length (LFSYN0.[7:0]) 10B 16 chips sync pattern length (LFSYN1.[7:0] and LFSYN0.[7:0]) 11B 18 chips sync pattern length (LFSYNCFG.[5:4], LFSYN1.[7:0] and LFSYN0.[7:0]) SYNM 1:0 rw LF synchronizer mode Detailed information can be found in Chapter 2.10.3.1. 00B Synchronization with 0/1 or 1/0 transition (Manchester) or 2 consecutive chips with same level (BiPhase). Set wake-up mask SFR WUM for Carrier Detect wake-up. 01B Synchronization with sync pattern. Set wake-up mask SFR WUM for sync match wake-up. 10B Synchronization with 0/1 or 1/0 transition (Manchester) or 2 consecutive chips with same level (BiPhase) and a subsequent wake-up pattern. Set wake-up mask SFR WUM for pattern match wake-up. 11B Synchronization with sync pattern and wake-up pattern. Set wakeup mask SFR WUM for sync match and/or pattern match wake-up. Data Sheet Reserved 107 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.11 Sensor Interfaces and Data Acquisition The PMA5110 has two internal sensors to acquire environmental data, two highly sensitive differential analog interfaces with 4 programmable gain factors (from 76 +-20 %, 60 +-20 %, 50 +-20 % and 38 +-20 % ), and one standard differential analog interface (gain factor 1): • • • Temperature sensor Battery voltage monitoring External data through analog interface The analog data is acquired and digitalized by the internal 10-bit ADC. Measurement routines for acquiring temperature and battery voltage data are available within the Function Library that is described in [1]. 2.11.1 Sensor Interface Sensor Interface Control Logic MUX A D C Channel 0 Ch0 p,Ch0 n Channel 1 Ch1p ,Ch1n Channel 2 Ch2 p,Ch2n Channel 3 Ch3p,Ch3n Channel 4 Ch4p,Ch4n Ch5p,Ch5n Channel 5 Ch6p ,Ch6n Channel 6 Ch7 p,Ch7n Channel 7 Figure 31 External Sensor Interface Battery Sensor Temperature Sensor Standard Sensor Interface AMUX1 AMUX2 Internal Reference Voltage VReg Sensor VDD (sens .) V1P (sens.) V1N (sens.) V2P (sens.) V2N (sens.) Block Diagram of the Sensor Interface The sensor interface connects to the external sensors and to the internal (on-chip) temperature and batteryvoltage sensors. Data Sheet 108 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description All signal channels can be configured for differential or single-ended operation. Differential operation is only recommended for signals in which the common-mode voltage is stable, while the positive and negative signal voltages vary symmetrically around the common-mode voltage. The input multiplexer selects one channel for the input signal and one channel for the reference voltage to the ADC. Any channel can be selected as the reference except channels 6 and 7, which are specially adapted to the low-level signals from external sensors. 2.11.1.1 Two Differential Highly Sensitive Interfaces to External Sensors Differential highly sensitive sensor interface 1 (Channel 6) V1P/V1N are the positive/negative differential voltage inputs. Differential highly sensitive sensor interface 2 (Channel 7) V2P/V2N are the positive/negative differential voltage inputs. Channel gain selection The SFR bit ADCC1.5-4 [GAIN1-0] gain factor selection allows the selection of the sensitivity of the analog input channels 6 and 7. The gain factor is one for all other input channels (see Table 18 “Selection of the Gain Factor” on Page 109). Table 18 Selection of the Gain Factor Gain factor (gain) Channel ADCM.CS2-0 GAIN1 GAIN0 76 +/- 20% 11X 0 0 60 +/- 20% 11X 0 1 50 +/- 20% 11X 1 0 38 +/- 20% 11X 1 1 1 Others 0 0 1 Others 0 1 1 Others 1 0 1 Others 1 1 Sensor Excitation Sensors connected to channel 6 or 7 can have their supply voltages provided by the PMA5110. For channel 6, connect the supply terminals of the sensor between VDD(sens) and VM1 (pin 3). For channel 7, use VDD(sens) and VM2. The supply is switched on only when a measurement of the corresponding channel is done. A settling time delay between sensor power-on and measurement can be programmed, refer to Chapter 2.11.4.1.2. Wheatstone Bridge Sensor Connection Wheatstone bridges can be used to set the operating point of external sensors, if needed. Figure 32 “Wheatstone Bridge Sensor Connection” on Page 110 shows the connection of two wheatstone bridges to the differential high sensitivity sensor interfaces 1 and 2 (channel 6 and channel 7). Data Sheet 109 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Figure 32 Wheatstone Bridge Sensor Connection 2.11.1.2 Interface to Other Signals V2N VM2 V2P VDD(sens) V1N VM1 V1P Functional Description Battery-voltage Interface (Channel 0) The positive input to the battery-voltage signal is derived by dividing voltage VBat by 3.5. The negative input is connected to GND. The battery voltage is converted with a resolution of approximately 4.1 mV, using an internal reference voltage of 1210 mV (channel 3) as a reference. Temperature-sensor Interface (Channel 1) The temperature signal to the ADC is a single-ended signal, with a temperature-sensitive voltage between 500 and 1100 mV. The temperature-sensor signal is digitized with a resolution of approximately 0.5°C, using an internal reference voltage of 1210 mV (channel 3) as a reference. Standard-sensor Interface (Channel 2) The positive input signal must be applied at AMUX1, and the negative input at AMUX2. Data Sheet 110 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.11.1.3 Reference Voltages When channel 6 or 7 is selected as input to the ADC, the reference voltage should be identical to the supply voltage of the sensor bridge, in order to get correct ratiometric operation. If the sensor bridge is connected between the VDD(sens) and VM1 (or VM2) pins of the PMA5110, channel 5 will provide the correct reference voltage. If the sensor is supplied by external power, the positive and negative supply voltages of the sensor bridge should be connected to channel 2, and this channel should be used as a reference (see Figure 33). The supply voltage of the sensor must always be within the range GND to VREG. Sensor bridge AMUX1 AMUX2 PMA 71xx V1P V1N External power supply Figure 33 External Sensor Use Channel 2 as Reference Voltage 3 channels on the ADC input multiplexer carry voltages that are intended as reference voltages for the converter: Internal Reference Voltage (Channel 3) This reference is a nominal voltage of 1210 mV. It is intended as a reference for the temperature and VBat measurements. VREG Reference (Channel 4) This reference is the VREG voltage. This is the highest allowable input voltage to the ADC, and is meant as a reference for the test signal, to allow as large a test signal as possible. BRIDGE SUPPLY Reference (Channel 5) When channel 6 or 7 is selected as the input to the ADC, the reference voltage is the bridge supply voltage. A multiplexer selects the appropriate negative bridge supply. This reference must be used with the ratiometric sensors in order to achieve an accuracy that is independent of the battery voltage. 2.11.2 Temperature Sensor Temperature measurement is performed by a dedicated Library function. See Temperature Sensor Characteristics for the sensor specification. 2.11.3 Battery Voltage Monitor Battery voltage measurement is performed by a dedicated Library function. See Battery Sensor Characteristics for the sensor specification. Data Sheet 111 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.11.4 Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) The ADC is a fully differential charge-balancing 10-bit converter. It uses a technique known as redundant successive approximation, which requires 12 decisions to arrive at a 10-bit result. The redundancy means that the ranges of the successive approximation partially overlap, making the conversion more robust to noise. The ADC can perform sub conversions with any number of bits. This means that the charge redistribution is done with the result of the previous conversion as a starting point, and doing the comparator decisions only for the selected number of less significant bit positions. A digitally controlled attenuator allows the gain setting of the highly sensitive ADC inputs. At ADC inputs, inverters are used to perform two identical conversions with inverted comparator input signals to compensate comparator offset digitally. They are controlled by the SFR bit ADCC1.6 [CSI] (see ADC Configuration Register 1). If the average of the 2 measurements is taken, the offset of the comparator is canceled. 2.11.4.1 ADC Timing ADCClock ∫∫ SFR ADCM.7 [ADCStart] ∫∫ ∫∫ SFR ADCC0.6-4 [TVC] SFR ADCC0.2-0 [STC] SFR ADCC1.7 [SeDC] SFR ADCC1.6 [CSI] SFR ADCC1.5-4 [GAIN] SFR ADCC1.3 [FCnSC] SFR ADCC1.2-0 [SUBC] SFR ADCM.6-4 [RV] SFR ADCM.3 [SBSEn] SFR ADCM.2-0 [CS] SFR ADCOFF.5-0 [OFF5_0] ∫∫ SFR ADCS.0 [BUSY] SFR ADCS.1 [SAMPLE] SFR ADCS.6 [SARSATL] SFR ADCS.5 [SARSATH] SFR ADCS.4 [CL000] SFR ADCS.3 [CG3FF] SFR ADCS.1 [SAMPLE] SFR ADCDL SFR ADCDH ∫∫ don't care ∫∫ ∫∫ ∫∫ ∫∫ result of previous conversion ∫∫ result of current conversion SFR CFG1.3 [ADCEn] SFR CFG2.3 [PDADC] Figure 34 ADC Timing diagram (standard conversion) ADC power (VADC) must be turned on (using CFG2.3 [PDADC]) before the ADC is enabled (using CFG1.3 [ADCEn]). AD conversions can then be started by setting ADCM.7 [ADCStart] to 1B. ADCM.3 [SBSEn] can be used to enable the Wheatstone Bridge supply if needed. The timing diagram of a conversion is shown above. ADC-Start and all other control signals are latched with the following rising edge of the ADC-Clock. This generates the status bits ADCS.0 [BUSY] as well as ADCS.1 [SAMPLE] which indicates the sample and hold activity of the channel input signals. The result registers ADCDH and ADCDL are written at the same time. With the next rising edge of the ADC-Clock the result bits are stable. ADC power (VADC) can then be turned off again Data Sheet 112 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description by setting CFG2.3 [PDADC]. Only the analog part of the ADC is powered off, thus the result register will not be affected thereby. 2.11.4.1.1 Clock Divider An ADC clock divider allows the adaption of the ADC speed to the CPU8051 and peripheral units clock fCPU. The clock divider factor settings are selected by ADCC0.6-4 [TVC]. The ADC clock frequency is calculated with equation shown in Figure 35. f ADC [ Hz ] = fCPU [ Hz ] TVC TVC .. ADCC0.6-4 [TVC] Figure 35 ADC frequency calculation 2.11.4.1.2 Sample Time Delay The sample time delay (Sample time adjustment factor STC) of the analog input channel is selected by the bits ADCC0.2-0 [STC2-0]. The sample time tsample of the analog input channels can be calculated using the formula shown in Figure 36 “ADC sample time delay” on Page 113. t sample [ s ] = 1 ⋅ TVC ⋅ STC fCPU [ Hz ] TVC .. ADCC0.6-4 [TVC] STC .. ADCC0.2-0 [STC] Figure 36 ADC sample time delay The scheme of sample time generation is drawn in Figure 37 “Generation of ADC clock and the sample time signal” on Page 113. fADC ADC-clock control Sample time control sample STC TVC fCPU Figure 37 2.11.4.1.3 Generation of ADC clock and the sample time signal Conversion Time The ADC conversion time has three contributors. First, the sample time where the input signal voltage level is stored in the sampling capacitors. Second, the successive approximation to determine the output code. A full conversion needs 12 ADC clock cycles to produce a 10 bit conversion result. Third, 2 CPU clock cycles fCPU to synchronize all input and output signals to the interface. The conversion time is calculated with the formula shown in Figure 38 “Calculation of the ADC conversion time using full conversion” on Page 114. Data Sheet 113 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description t conv [ s ] = 1 ⋅ ( TVC ⋅ ( STC + 12 ) + 2 ) fCPU [ Hz ] TVC .. ADCC0.6-4 [TVC] STC .. ADCC0.2-0 [STC] Figure 38 Calculation of the ADC conversion time using full conversion Sub conversions with reduced length need less ADC clock cycles. The conversion time for sub conversions is calculated with the formula shown in Figure 39 “Calculation of the ADC conversion time using sub conversion” on Page 114. t conv [ s ] = 1 ⋅ ( TVC ⋅ ( STC + SUBC ) + 2 ) fCPU [ Hz ] TVC .. ADCC0.6-4 [TVC] STC .. ADCC0.2-0 [STC] SUBC .. ADCC1.2-0 [SUBC] Figure 39 Calculation of the ADC conversion time using sub conversion 2.11.4.2 ADC Configuration 2.11.4.2.1 Reference- and Signal Voltage Selection The input multiplexer of the ADC is used for selection of both reference voltage (see SFR bit ADCM.6-4 [RV2-0]) and signal voltage (see SFR bit ADCM.2-0 [CS2-0]). 2.11.4.2.2 Single ended / Differential Conversion In order to obtain the highest accuracy, single-ended conversion must be used for channels 0 - 2. In single-ended conversion, only the positive input of the selected channel is used, the negative input is connected to GND internally. The high sensitivity inputs (channel 6 and 7) must be used in the differential mode. 2.11.4.2.3 Comparator Signal Inversion The ADCC1.6 [CSI] inverts the polarity of the comparator with respect to the signal. By averaging two conversions with opposite polarity, the comparator offset is eliminated. 2.11.4.2.4 Channel Gain Selection The ADCC1.5-4 [GAIN1-0] gain factor selection allows the selection of the sensitivity of the analog input channels 6 and 7. The gain is one for all other input channels 2.11.4.2.5 Full Conversion or Sub Conversion The ADCC1.3 [FCnSC] allows the selection of a conversion of all bits of the code range (10 bits, full conversion) or of a reduced number of bits (sub conversion). The number of bits is chosen by the bits ADCC1.2-0 [SUBC]. All higher bits are taken from the result of the previous conversion. The ADC state machine automatically subtracts half of the sub conversion range from the result of the previous conversion. Therefore the signal values can vary between the value of the previous conversion minus half of the weight of the sub conversion range to the value of the previous conversion plus half of the weight of the sub conversion range. 2.11.4.2.6 Analog Offset Correction of the Wheatstone Bridge Signals In order to use the full ADC input range to convert the sensor signals, it is desirable to perform a correction of the output voltage from the connected wheatstone bridge. The correction can be viewed as a constant voltage which is added to the wheatstone bridge output. The implementation takes advantage of the differential charge Data Sheet 114 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description redistribution structure of the ADC, by adding additional capacitor arrays for the offset correction. The analog offset correction performs two functions 1. Cancel the major part of the sensor's offset voltage. 2. Position the sensor signal so that it utilizes the full input range of the ADC. It is also possible to operate the ADC with zero offset correction. The bits ADCOFF.5-0 [OFF5-0] allow the selection of an analog offset correction to the analog input voltage. The offset is a function of the reference voltage, the bits ADCOFF.5-0 [OFF5-0] parameter and a fixed gain factor of 1/50. The number format is 2’s complement. The offset value can be calculated with the formula shown in Figure 40 “ADC offset voltage calculation” on Page 115. U offset = U ref goff ⎛ 4 i ⎞ ⋅ ⋅ ⎜ ∑ 2 ⋅ OFF ( i ) − ( 25 ⋅ OFF ( 5 )) ⎟ 32 50 ⎝ i = 0 ⎠ OFF .. ADCOFF.5-0 Figure 40 ADC offset voltage calculation The offset gain factor (goff) is determined by the selection of input channel (ADCM.2-0[CS]) and input gain (ADCC1.5-4[GAIN]) as described in Table 18 “Selection of the Gain Factor” on Page 109. The reference voltage Uref is the input voltage of the selected reference voltage source (ADCM.6-4[RV2-0]). 2.11.4.3 ADC Conversion Result The ADC conversion result (resultcode) data format is binary unsigned and stored in ADCH and ADCL. The type of single ended/differential conversion is selected with bit ADCC1.7[SeDC]. The result of a single ended/differential conversion can be calculated with the formulas shown in Figure 41 “Calculation of single ended conversion” on Page 115 and Figure 42 “Calculation of differential conversion” on Page 115. The truncation function takes the integer value of the calculation. The gain factor is obtained from Table 18 “Selection of the Gain Factor” on Page 109. UChannel is the voltage at the selected input channel. For Uoffset voltage calculation see Figure 40 “ADC offset voltage calculation” on Page 115. ⎛ U + U offset ⎞ ⎟⎟ result code = trunc⎜⎜ 210 ⋅ gain ⋅ channel U ref ⎝ ⎠ Figure 41 Calculation of single ended conversion ⎛ + U offset U result code = 29 + trunc ⎜⎜ 29 ⋅ gain ⋅ channel U ref ⎝ Figure 42 ⎞ ⎟⎟ ⎠ Calculation of differential conversion Output Status Bits The ADC provides separate status bits for underflow and overflow after the conversion. The output value remains at the maximum value in case of an overflow, and at the minimum value in case of an underflow. All status bits are defined in ADCS and are active high. Data Sheet 115 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.11.5 Register Description Table 19 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Page Number ADCM ADC Mode Register D2H 77H 120 ADCS ADC Status Register D3H 00H 122 ADCDL ADC Result Register low byte D4H 00H 119 ADCDH ADC Result Register high byte D5H 00H 119 ADCOFF ADC Input Offset c-network configuration DAH 00H 121 ADCC0 ADC Configuration Register 0 DBH 00H 116 ADCC1 ADC Configuration Register 1 DCH 00H 118 ADC Configuration Register 0 ADCC0 ADC Configuration Register 0 7 6 Offset Wakeup Value DBH 00H 4 Res 3 Res TVC rw Field Bits Res 7 TVC 6:4 Res 3 Data Sheet Type Reset Value 00H 2 0 STC rw Description Reserved rw Internal Clock Divider 000B Divider factor 8 001B Divider factor 10 010B Divider factor 12 011B Divider factor 14 100B Divider factor 16 101B Divider factor 18 110B Divider factor 20 111B Divider factor 1 Reserved 116 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Field Bits Type Description STC 2:0 rw Sample Time Adjustment 000B 2 periods of ADC clock 001B 4 periods of ADC clock 010B 5 periods of ADC clock 011B 6 periods of ADC clock 100B 7 periods of ADC clock 101B 8 periods of ADC clock 110B 12 periods of ADC clock 111B 16 periods of ADC clock Data Sheet 117 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description ADC Configuration Register 1 ADCC1 ADC Configuration Register 1 5 Offset Wakeup Value DCH 00H 4 3 Reset Value 00H 7 6 2 0 SeDC CSI GAIN FCnSC SUBC rw rw rw rw rw Field Bits Type Description SeDC 7 rw Single ended or differential conversion 0B Single ended conversion 1B Differential conversion CSI 6 rw Comparator signal inversion 0B Signal inversion off 1B Signal inversion on GAIN 5:4 rw Gain setting of channel 7-6 (see Table 18) All other channels have gain one. 00B Gain factor 76 +/-20% 01B Gain factor 60 +/-20% 10B Gain factor 50 +/-20% 11B Gain factor 38 +/-20% FCnSC 3 rw Full conversion or sub conversion 0B Sub conversion (reduced number of bits converted (see SUBC)) 1B Full conversion (all bits are determined) SUBC 2:0 rw Sub conversion Number of converted bits. The result of the previous conversion acts as offset for the current conversion. 000B 2 bits converted 001B 3 bits converted 010B 4 bits converted 011B 5 bits converted 100B 6 bits converted 101B 7 bits converted 110B 8 bits converted 111B 9 bits converted Data Sheet 118 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description ADC Result Register High Byte ADCDH ADC Result Register high byte Offset Wakeup Value D5H 00H 7 Reset Value 00H 2 1 Res 0 ADCDH r Field Bits Res 7:2 ADCDH 1:0 Type Description Reserved r ADC conversion data bit 9 - bit 8 ADC Result Register Low Byte ADCDL ADC Result Register low byte Offset Wakeup Value D4H 00H 7 Reset Value 00H 0 ADCDL r Field Bits Type Description ADCDL 7:0 r ADC conversion data bit 7 - bit 0 Data Sheet 119 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description ADC Mode Register ADCM ADC Mode Register 7 6 Offset Wakeup Value D2H 77H 4 3 Reset Value 77H 2 0 ADCStar t RV SBSEn CS rcw rw rcw rw Field Bits Type Description ADCStart 7 rcw ADC conversion start 0B Idle 1B ADC starts conversion. Bit is cleared automatically RV 6:4 rw Reference voltage selection 000B Battery sensor signal (channel 0) 001B Temperature sensor signal (channel 1) 010B Standard differential analog interface AMUX1, AMUX2 (channel 2) 011B Internal reference voltage (channel 3) 100B Vreg Sensor signal (channel 4) 101B Wheatstone bridge supply - VDDsens (channel 5) 110B Reserved 111B Reserved SBSEn 3 rcw Sensor bridge supply enable 0B Sensor bridge supply disabled Sensor bridge supply enabled. Bit is cleared automatically 1B CS 2:0 rw Analog channel selection 000B Battery sensor signal (channel 0) 001B Temperature sensor signal (channel 1) 010B Standard differential analog interface AMUX1, AMUX2 (channel 2) 011B Internal reference voltage (channel 3) 100B Vreg Sensor signal (channel 4) 101B Wheatstone bridge supply - VDDsens (channel 5) 110B Differential high sensitivity input 1 (channel 6) 111B Differential high sensitivity input 2 (channel 7) Data Sheet 120 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description ADC Input Offset c-Network Configuration ADCOFF ADC Input Offset c-network configuration 7 6 Offset Wakeup Value DAH 00H 5 Reset Value 00H 0 OFF5 OFF5_0 r rw Field Bits Type Description OFF5 7:6 r ADC Input offset compensation copy of bit 5 These two bits are set automatically by hardware and always have the same value as OFF.5. This is needed for correct representation of 2’s complement for all 8 bits of this register. OFF5_0 5:0 rw ADC Input offset compensation network selection The offset voltage can be calculated with the offset value (OFF) using formula Figure 40 “ADC offset voltage calculation” on Page 115. The number format of the offset value (OFF) is 2’s complement. 000000B 00H 000001B 01H 000010B 02H ... 011110B 1EH 011111B 1FH 100000B -20H 100001B -1FH 100010B -1EH ... 111110B -02H 111110B -01H Data Sheet 121 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description ADC Status Register ADCS ADC Status Register Offset Wakeup Value D3H 00H Reset Value 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Res SARSATL SARSATH CL000 CG3FF Res SAMPLE BUSY r r r r r r Field Bits Type Res 7 SARSATL 6 r Negative saturation of SAR SARSATH 5 r Positive saturation of SAR CL000 4 r Saturation of c-net control word 000H saturation of c-net control word CG3FF 3 r Saturation of c-net control word 3FFH saturation of c-net control word Res 2 SAMPLE 1 r Sample/Hold 0B hold 1B sample BUSY 0 r Busy 0B Conversion finished Conversion running 1B Data Sheet Description Reserved Reserved 122 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.12 16 bit CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) Generator/Checker CRC is a powerful method to detect errors in data packets that have been transmitted over a distorted connection. The CRC Generator/Checker divides each byte of a transmitted/received data packet by a polynomial, leaving the remainder, which represents the checksum. The CRC Generator/Checker uses the 16-bit CCITT polynomial 1021H (x16+x12+x5+1). The 16-bit start value is determined by SFR CRC0 and SFR CRC1. The CRC Generator/Checker can process 8-bit parallel and/or serial data. Figure 43 gives an overview over the CRC Generator/Checker. A CRC generation and CRC checking example can be found in Figure 44. Polynomial = 0x1021 Strobe SFR CRCC CRCSS CRCSD CRC-CCITT CRC Shift register / Logic Data SFR CRCR1 CRC-Result <15:8> SFR CRCD Figure 43 CRC-Result <7:0> SFR CRCR0 MSB CRC-Data 8 bit SFR CRCS CRCValid CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) Generator/Checker CRC Generation (Transmitter side ) CRC1 CRC0 Preload value 0xFF 0xFF Example data 0xAB 0x02 0x04 0xCC 0x00 0xB5 CRC1 CRC0 Resulting CRC16 0xB5 0x06 Append checksum to transmitted data 0x06 CRC Checking (Receiver side) CRC1 CRC0 Preload value 0xFF 0xFF Example data incl. Checksum 0xAB 0x02 0x04 0xCC 0x00 0xB5 0x06 CRC1 CRC0 Resulting CRC16 0x00 0x00 (CRCC.CRCValid = 1) Figure 44 CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) Generator/Checker example 2.12.1 Byte-aligned CRC Generation CRC generation is done by executing the following steps: • • The CRC shift register has to be initialized by writing a start value to both SFR CRC0 and SFR CRC1. If the CRC shift register is not initialized, the default value is 00H. The data bytes which are used for the CRC generation have to be shifted one after the other into the SFR CRCD. The process of CRC generation is automatically invoked when data bytes are written to the SFR CRCD. Data Sheet 123 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description • The resulting checksum is available in the CRC result register SFR CRC0 and SFR CRC1 after the last data byte has been processed. 2.12.2 Byte-aligned CRC Checking CRC checking is done by executing the following steps: • • • • The CRC shift register has to be initialized by writing the initialization value of the CRC generation process to both SFR CRC0 and SFR CRC1. The data bytes which should be checked have to be shifted one after the other into the SFR CRCD. It is important that the order (MSB-LSB) is the same as it was during CRC generation. The process of CRC checking is automatically invoked when data bytes are written to the SFR CRCD. The 16-bit CRC value is written to the SFR CRCD beginning with the high byte after processing all user data. The SFR Bit CRCC.1[CRCValid] indicates the correctness of the CRC calculation after the last data byte has been processed and both SFR CRC0 and SFR CRC1 are 0. 2.12.3 Serial bit stream CRC Generation/Checking The CRC Generator/Checker features an additional serial mechanism to perform CRC generation and checking of non-byte-aligned data streams. In this case SFR Bit CRCC.5[CRCSS] and SFR Bit CRCC.6[CRCSD] are used instead of SFR CRCD. The data stream is written bit-by-bit into SFR Bit CRCC.6[CRCSD]. Each bit is processed by forcing the flag SFR Bit CRCC.5[CRCSS] to 1B. The following figure shows an example of the usage of SFR Bit CRCC.5[CRCSS] and SFR Bit CRCC.6[CRCSD]. Data to be encoded 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 CRCC.6 [CRCSD] CRCC.5 [CRCSS] Figure 45 Example of Serial CRC Generation/checking Note: The serial and byte-aligned generation/checking mechanism is interchangeable within the same generation/checking process. For example, if a data packet consists of 18 bits, then 16 bits can be processed byte-aligned via SFR CRCD and the two remaining bits can be processed bit-aligned by using SFR Bit CRCC.5[CRCSS] and SFR Bit CRCC.6[CRCSD]. Data Sheet 124 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.12.4 Register Description Table 20 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Page Number CRCC CRC Control Register A9H 02H 125 CRCD CRC Data Register AAH 00H 126 CRC0 CRC Shift Register low byte ACH 00H 126 CRC1 CRC Shift Register high byte ADH 00H 127 CRC Control Register CRCC CRC Control Register 7 6 5 Res CRCSD CRCSS rw rw Wakeup Value A9H 02H 4 2 Res Reset Value 02H 1 0 CRCVali d Res r Field Bits Res 7 CRCSD 6 rw CRC Serial Data CRCSS 5 rw CRC Serial Data Strobe Use CRCSS to serial strobe data bit CRCSD into CRC encoding/decoding procedure. 0B No calculation cycle is done 1B One calculation cycle is done with every write access to CRCSD or CRCSS Res 4:2 CRCValid 1 Res 0 Data Sheet Type Offset Description Reserved Reserved r CRC Valid Is set by hardware on valid CRC results, that means all CRC-bits are 0 0B CRC result invalid (at least one bit in CRC0 or CRC1 is 1B) 1B CRC result valid (all bits in CRC0 and CRC1 are 0B) Reserved 125 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description CRC Data Register CRCD CRC Data Register Offset Wakeup Value AAH 00H Reset Value 00H 7 0 CRCD rw Field Bits Type Description CRCD 7:0 rw CRC Data Register CRC Shift Register low byte CRC0 CRC Shift Register low byte Offset Wakeup Value ACH 00H 7 Reset Value 00H 0 CRC7_0 rw Field Bits Type Description CRC7_0 7:0 rw CRC Shift Register bit 7 down to bit 0 Data Sheet 126 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description CRC Shift Register high byte CRC1 CRC Shift Register high byte Offset Wakeup Value ADH 00H 7 Reset Value 00H 0 CRC8_15 rw Field Bits Type Description CRC8_15 7:0 rw CRC Shift Register bit 15 down to bit 8 Data Sheet 127 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.13 8 bit Pseudo Random Number Generator For many applications, a pseudo-random number generator is needed, e.g. to vary the interval period between transmissions. For this purpose, a Maximum Length linear Feedback Shift Register (MLFSR) is available as a hardware unit. A user-defined start value (except 00H) can be written to SFR RNGD. The default value after startup is 55H. With every read access to SFR RNGD a new pseudo-random number is generated. 2.13.1 Register Description Random Number Generator Data Register RNGD Random Number Generator Data Register Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value ABH UUUUUUUUB 55H 7 0 RNGD rw Field Bits Type Description RNGD 7:0 rw Random Number Generator Data Register Data Sheet 128 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.14 Timers The PMA51xx comprises four independent 16-bit timers. Timers 0/1 operate as up-counters, and Timers 2/3 operate as down-counters. 2.14.1 Timer 0 and Timer 1 Timer/Counter 0 and 1 are fully compatible with Timer/Counter 0 and 1 of the Standard 8051 microcontroller. Timer 0/1 operate as up-counters and use the selected system clock divided by 6. 2.14.1.1 Basic Timer Operations The external inputs PP1 and PP9 can be programmed to function as a gate for Timer/Counters 0 and 1 to facilitate pulse-width measurements. Each timer consists of two 8-bit registers (TH0 and TL0 for Timer/Counter 0, TH1 and TL1 for Timer/Counter 1) that may be combined to one timer configuration depending on the mode that is established. The functions of the timers are controlled by two SFRs, TCON and TMOD. The operating modes are described and shown for Timer 0. If not explicitly noted, this applies also to Timer 1. Setting the SFR bit TCON.4[TR0] (respectively SFR bit TCON.6[TR1]) starts Timer 0 (resp. Timer 1). It counts using the selected clock (see SFR TMOD) until the timer has an overflow. SFR bit TCON.5[TF0] (resp. SFR bit TCON.7[TF1] is set. If the selected timer mode uses timer reload, then the timer is automatically reloaded and restarted. If the selected timer mode does not use timer reload, the timer is stopped and SFR bit TCON.4[TR0] (resp. SFR bit TCON.6[TR1]) is cleared. 2.14.1.2 Timer Modes Timer/Counter 0 and 1 can be used in the following four operating modes: • • • • Mode 0: 8 bit timer/counter with a divide-by-32 prescaler (13 bit timer register: 8 bit + 5 bit prescaler) Mode 1: 16 bit timer/counter Mode 2: 8 bit timer/counter with 8 bit auto-reload Mode 3: Timer/Counter 0 is configured as one 8 bit timer/counter and one 8 bit counter counting machine cycles.Timer/counter 1 in this mode holds its count. The effect is the same as setting TR1 = 0. 2.14.1.2.1 Timer/Counter 0/1 - Mode 0 Figure 46 “Timer/Counter 0, Mode 0, 13-Bit Timer/Counter” on Page 129 shows the Mode 0 operation. OSC IE.7[EA] -: 6 IE.1[ET0] TMOD.2[T0C/T] 0 TL0 (5 Bits) 1 TH0 (8 Bits) & Interrupt Timer 0 TCON.5 [TF0] T0Count/PP1 TCON4.[TR0] TMOD3.[T0Gate] T0Gate/PP0 Figure 46 Data Sheet 1 & _1 > Timer/Counter 0, Mode 0, 13-Bit Timer/Counter 129 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.14.1.2.2 Timer/Counter 0/1 - Mode 1 Mode 1 is equal to Mode 0 but in Mode 1, the timer register is running with all 16 bits. 2.14.1.2.3 Timer/Counter 0/1 - Mode 2 Mode 2 configures the Timer register as an 8-bit counter in TL0 (resp. TL1) with automatic reload, as shown in Figure 47 “Timer/Counter 0, Mode 2: 8-bit Timer/Counter with auto-reload” on Page 130. Overflow from TL0 (resp. TL1) not only sets TCON.5 [TF0] (resp. TCON.7 [TF1]), but also reloads TL0 (resp. TL1) with the contents of TH0 (resp. TH1), which is preset by software. The reload leaves TH0 (resp. TH1) unchanged. -: 6 OSC IE.7[EA] IE.1[ET0] TMOD.2[T0C/T] 0 TL0 (8 Bits) 1 & Interrupt Timer 0 TCON.5 [TF0] T0Count/PP1 TCON4.[TR0] TMOD3.[T0Gate] T0Gate/PP0 Figure 47 2.14.1.2.4 1 & Reload TH0 (8 Bits) _ >1 Timer/Counter 0, Mode 2: 8-bit Timer/Counter with auto-reload Timer/Counter 0/1 - Mode 3 Mode 3 has different effects on Timer 0 and Timer 1. Timer 1 in Mode 3 simply holds its count. The effect is the same as setting TCON.6 [TR1]=0. Timer 0 establishes TL0 and TH0 as two separate counters (Figure 48 “Timer/Counter 0, Mode 3: Two 8-bit Timers/Counters” on Page 131). TL0 uses the Timer 0 control bits: TMOD.2 [T0C/T], TMOD.3 [T0Gate], TCON.4 [TR0], TCON.5 [TF0] and the pin status of PP0. TH0 is locked into a timer function (counting machine cycles) and takes over the use of TCON.6 [TR1] and TCON.7 [TF1] from Timer 1. Thus, TH0 now controls the Timer 1 interrupt. Mode 3 is provided for applications requiring an extra 8-bit timer or counter. When Timer 0 is in Mode 3, Timer 1 can be turned on and off by switching it out of and into its own Mode 3, or in fact, in any application not requiring an interrupt from Timer 1 itself. Data Sheet 130 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description IE.7[EA] IE.3[ET1] TCON.6[TR1] OSC -: 6 TMOD.2[T0C/T] 0 1 T0Count/PP1 1 TCON.7 [TF1] TL0 (8 Bits) TCON.5 [TF0] IE.7[EA] TCON4.[TR0] TMOD3.[T0Gate] TH0 (8 Bits) & Interrupt Timer 1 & Interrupt Timer 0 IE.1[ET0] & _ >1 T0Gate/PP0 Figure 48 Timer/Counter 0, Mode 3: Two 8-bit Timers/Counters 2.14.1.3 Timer/Counter 0/1 Interrupt support This module supports interrupt generation on overflow of Timer/Counter 0 as well as Timer/Counter 1. In addition to these timer/counter interrupts, two external interrupts are handled by this unit (ref. to standard 8051). On overflow of the up counting timer/counter from all 1B to all 0B, the flag TCON.5 [TF0] or TCON.7 [TF1] is set by hardware. These flags acts as interrupt request flags. A 1B indicates a pending interrupt request. These flags are cleared by hardware as on standard 8051 when the corresponding interrupt vector has been fetched by the CPU. 2.14.1.4 Register Description Table 21 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Page Number TCON Timer Control Register Timer 0/1 88H 00H 132 TMOD Timer Mode Register Timer 0/1 89H 00H 135 TL0 Timer 0 Register low byte 8AH 00H 134 TL1 Timer 1 Register low byte 8BH 00H 134 TH0 Timer 0 Register high byte 8CH 00H 133 TH1 Timer 1 Register high byte 8DH 00H 133 Data Sheet 131 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Timer Control Register Timer 0/1 TCON Timer Control Register Timer 0/1 Offset Wakeup Value 88H 00H Reset Value 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TF1 TR1 TF0 TR0 IE1 IT1 IE0 IT0 rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw Field Bits Type Description TF1 7 rw Timer 1 Overflow Flag This flag is set on timer overflow and automatically cleared by hardware if the interrupt service routine is entered. In polling mode this bit has to be cleared by software. TR1 6 rw Timer 1 Run Control Bit 0B Stop Timer 1 / Timer 1 does not run 1B Start Timer 1 / Timer 1 runs TF0 5 rw Timer 0 Overflow Flag This flag is set on timer overflow and automatically cleared by hardware if the interrupt service routine is entered. In polling mode this bit has to be cleared by software. TR0 4 rw Timer 0 Run Control Bit 0B Stop Timer 0 / Timer 0 does not run 1B Start Timer 0 / Timer 0 runs IE1 3 rw Interrupt 1 Request Flag This is the interrupt request flag for external interrupt 1 (PP7) 0B Interrupt 1 has not been triggered 1B Interrupt 1 has been triggered IT1 2 rw Interrupt 1 Type Control bit 0B Interrupt 1 is triggered by a low level on PP7 1B Interrupt 1 is triggered by a falling edge on PP7 IE0 1 rw Interrupt 0 Request Flag This is the interrupt request flag for external interrupt 0 (PP9) 0B Interrupt 0 has not been triggered 1B Interrupt 0 has been triggered IT0 0 rw Interrupt 0 Type Control bit 0B Interrupt 0 is triggered by a low level on PP9 1B Interrupt 0 is triggered by a falling edge on PP9 Data Sheet 132 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Timer 0 Register high byte TH0 Timer 0 Register high byte Offset Wakeup Value 8CH 00H Reset Value 00H 7 0 TH0 rw Field Bits Type Description TH0 7:0 rw Timer 0 Register high byte Timer 1 Register high byte TH1 Timer 1 Register high byte Offset Wakeup Value 8DH 00H 7 Reset Value 00H 0 TH1 rw Field Bits Type Description TH1 7:0 rw Timer 1 Register high byte Data Sheet 133 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Timer 0 Register low byte TL0 Timer 0 Register low byte Offset Wakeup Value 8AH 00H Reset Value 00H 7 0 TL0 rw Field Bits Type Description TL0 7:0 rw Timer 0 Register low byte Timer 1 Register low byte TL1 Timer 1 Register low byte Offset Wakeup Value 8BH 00H 7 Reset Value 00H 0 TL1 rw Field Bits Type Description TL1 7:0 rw Timer 1 Register low byte Data Sheet 134 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Timer Mode Register Timer 0/1 TMOD Timer Mode Register Timer 0/1 7 6 T1Gate T1C/T rw rw 5 Offset Wakeup Value 89H 00H 4 Reset Value 00H 3 2 1 0 T1M T0Gate T0C/T T0M rw rw rw rw Field Bits Type Description T1Gate 7 rw Timer 1 Gate Control bit 0B Internal Enable: Use TR1 to enable the Timer/Counter 1B External Enable: Use PP8 and TR1 to enable the Timer/Counter T1C/T 6 rw Timer 1 Counter / Timer select 0B Timer 1B Counter: Count input is PP9 T1M 5:4 rw Timer 1 Mode select 00B Mode 0: 8 bit timer with a divided-by-32 prescaler 01B Mode 1: 16 bit timer 10B Mode 2: 8 bit timer with 8 bit auto-reload 11B Mode 3: Timer 1 hold its count. The effect is the same like setting TR1=0 T0Gate 3 rw Timer 0 Gate Control bit 0B Internal Enable: Use TR0 to enable the Timer/Counter 1B External Enable: Use PP0 and TR0 to enable the Timer/Counter T0C/T 2 rw Timer 0 Counter / Timer select 0B Timer 1B Counter: Count input is PP1 T0M 1:0 rw Timer 0 Mode select 00B Mode 0: 8 bit timer with a divided-by-32 prescaler 01B Mode 1: 16 bit timer 10B Mode 2: 8 bit timer with 8 bit auto-reload 11B Mode 3: Two 8 bit timers Data Sheet 135 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.14.2 Timer 2 and Timer 3 Timer 2 and Timer 3 operate as down-counters. The clock source and the timer mode can be selected using SFR TMOD2. 2.14.2.1 Basic Timer Operations Setting the SFR Bit TCON2.0[T2Run] (respectively SFR Bit TCON2.4[T3Run]) starts Timer 2 (resp. Timer 3). It counts using the selected clock (see SFR TMOD2) until the timer is elapsed. SFR Bit TCON2.1[T2Full] (resp. SFR Bit TCON2.5[T3Full] is set. If the selected timer mode used timer reload, then the timer is automatically reloaded and restarted on underrun. If the selected timer mode didn’t use timer reload, the timer is stopped on underrun and SFR Bit TCON2.0[T2Run] (resp. SFR Bit TCON2.4[T3Run]) is cleared. 2.14.2.2 Timer Modes Depending on the setting of the 3 bits of SFR Bit TMOD2.2 0[TM2-0], there are 8 timer modes selectable with Timer 2 and Timer 3. 2.14.2.2.1 Timer 2/3 - Mode 0 Comprises: • 16-bit timer with reload The timer unit is configured as a 16-bit reloadable timer. SFR TL2 and SFR TH2 hold the start value. If SFR Bit TCON2.0[T2Run] is set, the timer starts counting down. SFR Bit TCON2.1[T2Full] is set when the timer is elapsed (underflow from 00H to FFH). The timer value is reloaded from SFR TL3 and SFR TH3, and the timer is restarted automatically. SFR Bit TCON2.1[T2Full] has to be reset by software. It is not cleared on read access. Note: In this mode, both SFR Bit TCON2.4[T3Run] and SFR Bit TCON2.5[T3Full] are not used. IE.7[EA] TH2 TL2 IE.6[EID] T2Mask Timer 2 T2Run & Interrupt Timer 2 T2Full Reload Timer 2 Reload T3Run TL3 Figure 49 Data Sheet T3Full TH3 Timer 2/3 - Mode 0 136 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.14.2.2.2 Timer 2/3 - Mode 1 Comprises: • • 16-bit timer without reload 8-bit timer with reload and bit rate strobe signal for RF Transmitter Timer 2 operates as a 16-bit timer with start value in SFR TL2 and SFR TH2, timer run bit SFR Bit TCON2.0[T2Run] and timer elapsed indicator SFR Bit TCON2.1[T2Full]. If the timer elapses, it stops, sets SFR Bit TCON2.1[T2Full], and resets the timer run bit SFR Bit TCON2.0[T2Run]. Timer 3 sets up a reloadable 8-bit timer holding the startup value in SFR TL3, timer reload value in SFR TH3, timer run bit in SFR Bit TCON2.4[T3Run], and timer elapsed indicator in SFR Bit TCON2.5[T3Full]. IE.7[EA ] TL2 TH2 IE.6[EID] & T2Mask T2Run Interrupt Timer 2 T2Full Timer 2 Baudrate strobe T3Run Timer 3 Timer 3 Reload T3Full T3Mask Reload TL3 TH3 IE.6[EID] & Interrupt Timer 3 IE.7[EA] Figure 50 Data Sheet Timer 2/3 - Mode 1 137 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.14.2.2.3 Timer 2/3 - Mode 2 Comprises: • • 8-bit timer with reload 8-bit timer with reload and bit rate strobe signal for RF Transmitter Timer 2 sets up a reloadable 8-bit timer holding the start value SFR TL2, timer reload value SFR TH2, timer run bit SFR Bit TCON2.0[T2Run], and timer elapsed indicator SFR Bit TCON2.1[T2Full]. Timer 3 sets up a reloadable 8-bit timer holding the start value SFR TL3, timer reload value SFR TH3, timer run bit SFR Bit TCON2.4[T3Run], and timer elapsed indicator SFR Bit TCON2.5[T3Full]. IE.7[EA] IE.6[EID ] TL2 & Interrupt Timer 2 & Interrupt Timer 3 T2Mask TH2 T2Full T2Run Timer 2 Timer 2 Reload Reload T3Run Timer 3 Timer 3 Reload Baudrate strobe T3Full T3Mask Reload TL3 TH3 IE.6[EID] IE.7[EA] Figure 51 2.14.2.2.4 Timer 2/3 - Mode 2 Timer 2/3 - Mode 3 Comprises: • • • 8-bit timer without reload (1) 8-bit timer without reload (2) 8-bit timer with reload and bit rate strobe signal for RF Transmitter Timer 2 (1) utilizes SFR TL2 as starting value and T2Full as timer elapsed flag. Setting SFR Bit TCON2.0[T2Run] starts the timer, and SFR Bit TCON2.1[T2Full] is set when the timer is elapsed. SFR Bit TCON2.0[T2Run] is reset automatically if the timer elapses. Timer 2 (2) utilizes SFR TH2 as starting value and SFR Bit TCON2.5[T3Full] as timer elapsed flag. Setting SFR Bit TCON2.4[T3Run] starts the timer, and SFR Bit TCON2.5[T3Full] is set when the timer is elapsed. SFR Bit TCON2.4[T3Run] is reset automatically if the timer elapses. Timer 3 operates exclusively as an 8-bit bit rate timer for Manchester coding. Therefore the timer needs neither a run nor an elapsed bit. It is started automatically when the timer mode is set. Data Sheet 138 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description IE.7[EA ] IE.6[EID] TL2 & T2Mask TH2 Interrupt Timer 2 T2Full T2Run Timer 2 (1) Timer 2 (2) Baudrate strobe T3Run Timer 3 Timer 3 Reload T3Full T3Mask Reload TL3 TH3 & IE.6[EID ] Interrupt Timer 3 IE.7[EA] Figure 52 2.14.2.2.5 Timer 2/3 - Mode 3 Timer 2/3 - Mode 4 Comprises: • 16-bit timer with reload and bit rate strobe signal for RF Transmitter The timer unit is configured as a 16-bit reloadable timer. SFR TL3 and SFR TH3 hold the start value. As soon as SFR Bit TCON2.4[T3Run] is set, the timer starts counting. SFR Bit TCON2.5[T3Full] is set when the timer is elapsed. The timer value is reloaded from SFR TL2 and SFR TH2 and the timer is restarted automatically. SFR Bit TCON2.5[T3Full] has to be reset by software. It is not cleared on read-access. Note: In this mode, both SFR Bit TCON2.0[T2Run] and SFR Bit TCON2.1[T2Full] are not used. TH2 TL2 T2Run T2Full Timer 3 Reload Reload T3Run T3Full Timer 3 IE.7[EA] TL3 TH3 IE.6[EID] & Interrupt Timer 3 T3Mask Figure 53 Data Sheet Timer 2/3 - Mode 4 139 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.14.2.2.6 Timer 2/3 - Mode 5 Comprises: • • 8-bit timer with reload 16-bit timer without reload and bit rate strobe signal for RF Transmitter Timer 2 sets up a reloadable 8-bit timer holding the start value in SFR TL2, timer reload value in SFR TH2, timer run bit SFR Bit TCON2.0[T2Run], and timer elapsed indicator in SFR Bit TCON2.1[T2Full]. Timer 3 operates as a 16-bit timer with the start value in SFR TL3 and SFR TH3, timer run bit SFR Bit TCON2.4[T3Run], and timer elapsed indicator SFR Bit TCON2.5[T3Full]. If the timer elapses, the timer stops SFR Bit TCON2.5[T3Full] is set, and the timer run bit SFR Bit TCON2.4[T3Run] is reset. IE.7[EA] IE.6[EID ] TL2 & T2Mask TH2 Interrupt Timer 2 T2Full T2Run Timer 2 Timer 2 Reload Reload Timer 3 T3Run T3Full T3Mask TL3 TH3 IE.6[EID ] & Interrupt Timer 3 IE.7[EA] Figure 54 2.14.2.2.7 Timer 2/3 - Mode 5 Timer 2/3 - Mode 6 Comprises: • • 16-bit timer without reload 16-bit timer without reload and bit rate strobe signal for RF Transmitter Timer 2 operates as a 16-bit timer with the start value in SFR TL2 and SFR TH2, timer run bit SFR Bit TCON2.0[T2Run], and timer elapsed indicator SFR Bit TCON2.1[T2Full]. If the timer is elapsed the timer is stopped, SFR Bit TCON2.1[T2Full] is set, and the timer run bit SFR Bit TCON2.0[T2Run] is reset. Timer 3 operates as a 16-bit timer with the start value in SFR TL3 and SFR TH3, timer run bit SFR Bit TCON2.4[T3Run], and timer elapsed indicator SFR Bit TCON2.5[T3Full]. If the timer elapses, the timer stops, SFR Bit TCON2.5[T3Full] is set, and the timer run bit SFR Bit TCON2.4[T3Run] is reset. Data Sheet 140 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description IE.7[EA] TL2 TH2 IE.6[EID ] & Interrupt Timer 2 & Interrupt Timer 3 T2Mask T2Run Timer 2 Reload T2Full T3Run Timer 3 T3Full T3Mask TL3 TH3 IE.6[EID] IE.7[EA] Figure 55 2.14.2.2.8 Timer 2/3 - Mode 6 Timer 2/3 - Mode 7 Comprises: • • 16-bit timer for Interval Timer calibration 8-bit timer with reload and bit rate strobe signal for RF Transmitter Timer 2 operates as a 16-bit clock counter during one 2 kHz RC LP oscillator period with the counting value provided in SFR TL2 and SFR TH2, a timer run bit SFR Bit TCON2.0[T2Run], and timer overflow indicator SFR Bit TCON2.1[T2Full]. When SFR Bit TCON2.0[T2Run] is set, the counter starts counting on the next rising edge of the 2 kHz RC LP oscillator, and is stopped at the subsequent rising edge. This timer mode is used for Interval Timer Calibration by the Library functions, for example (see [1]). Timer 3 sets up a reloadable 8-bit timer holding the startup value in SFR TL3, timer reload value in SFR TH3, timer run bit in SFR bit TCON2.4[T3Run], and timer elapsed indicator in SFR Bit TCON2.5[T3Full]. Note: This timer mode is not recommended for application usage. It is used by the Library functions for calibration. IE.7[EA] TL2 TH2 IE.6[EID ] & Interrupt Timer 2 & Interrupt Timer 3 T2Mask T2Run Timer 2 T2Full RC-LP Period T3Run Baudrate strobe Timer 3 Timer 3 Reload Reload TL3 TH3 T3Full T3Mask IE.6[EID ] IE.7[EA] Figure 56 Data Sheet Timer 2/3 - Mode 7 141 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.14.2.3 Register Description Table 22 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Page Number TCON2 Timer Control Register Timer 2/3 C8H 00H 143 TMOD2 Timer Mode Register 2 Timer 2/3 C9H 00H 146 TL3 Timer 3 Register low byte CAH 00H 145 TH3 Timer 3 Register high byte CBH 00H 144 TL2 Timer 2 Register low byte CCH 00H 145 TH2 Timer 2 Register high byte CDH 00H 144 Data Sheet 142 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Timer Control Register Timer 2/3 TCON2 Timer Control Register Timer 2/3 Offset Wakeup Value C8H 00H Reset Value 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 T3Mask Res T3Full T3Run T2Mask Res T2Full T2Run rw rw rw rw rw rw Field Bits Type Description T3Mask 7 rw Timer 3 Interrupt Mask 0B Timer 3 interrupt is not blocked 1B Timer 3 interrupt is blocked (masked) Res 6 T3Full 5 rw Timer 3 Full Bit 0B No Timer 3 underrun occurred 1B Timer 3 underrun occurred T3Run 4 rw Timer 3 Run Bit 0B Stop Timer 3 / Timer 3 does not run 1B Start Timer 3 / Timer 3 runs T2Mask 3 rw Timer 2 Interrupt Mask 0B Timer 2 interrupt is not blocked 1B Timer 2 interrupt is blocked (masked) Res 2 T2Full 1 rw Timer 2 Full Bit 0B No Timer 2 underrun occurred 1B Timer 2 underrun occurred T2Run 0 rw Timer 2 Run Bit 0B Stop Timer 2 / Timer 2 does not run 1B Start Timer 2 / Timer 2 runs Data Sheet Reserved Reserved 143 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Timer 2 Register high byte TH2 Timer 2 Register high byte Offset Wakeup Value CDH 00H Reset Value 00H 7 0 TH2 rw Field Bits Type Description TH2 7:0 rw Timer 2 Register high byte Timer 3 Register high byte TH3 Timer 3 Register high byte Offset Wakeup Value CBH 00H 7 Reset Value 00H 0 TH3 rw Field Bits Type Description TH3 7:0 rw Timer 3 Register high byte Data Sheet 144 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Timer 2 Register low byte TL2 Timer 2 Register low byte Offset Wakeup Value CCH 00H Reset Value 00H 7 0 TL2 rw Field Bits Type Description TL2 7:0 rw Timer 2 Register low byte Timer 3 Register low byte TL3 Timer 3 Register low byte Offset Wakeup Value CAH 00H 7 Reset Value 00H 0 TL3 rw Field Bits Type Description TL3 7:0 rw Timer 3 Register low byte Data Sheet 145 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Timer Mode Register 2 Timer 2/3 TMOD2 Timer Mode Register 2 Timer 2/3 7 6 5 Offset Wakeup Value C9H 00H 4 T3Clk T2Clk rw rw 3 Res Reset Value 00H 2 0 TM rw Field Bits Type Description T3Clk 7:6 rw Timer 3 Clock Source Select (see Figure 9 “PMA5110 Clock Concept” on Page 52) 00B undivided system clock 01B system clock divided by 6 10B 2 kHz LP RC oscillator clock 11B PP2 event count (rising edge) T2Clk 5:4 rw Timer 2 Clock Source Select (see Figure 9 “PMA5110 Clock Concept” on Page 52) 00B undivided system clock 01B system clock divided by 6 10B 2 kHz LP RC oscillator clock 11B Timer 3 overflow event count Res 3 TM 2:0 Data Sheet Reserved rw Timer Mode 000B Mode 0 001B Mode 1 010B Mode 2 011B Mode 3 100B Mode 4 101B Mode 5 110B Mode 6 111B Mode 7 146 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.15 General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Ten GPIO pins are available and can either be used by the application for general purposes, or are assigned to a peripheral (Alternative Port Functionality). When used as GPIO pins, they can be accessed directly by the processor. Pull-up and pull-down resistors are configurable on demand to allow wired-AND and wired-OR functions. All peripheral port pins are configured as input with the pull-up resistor, which is enabled after a Power On Reset. Pin status will be kept during POWER DOWN state. 2.15.1 GPIO Port Configuration The following table shows the different possible configurations for the GPIO Port. Table 23 GPIO Port Configuration PPDx PPOx PPSx I/O Pull-up/ Pull-down Comment 0 0 - Output No LOW (sink) 0 1 - Output No HIGH (source) 1 0 - Input No High-Z (Tri-State Bidirectional) 1 1 0 Input Pull-up Weak-High (Quasi Bidirectional) 1 1 1 Input Pull-down Weak-Low (Quasi Bidirectional) Note: In addition, SFR Bit PPSx defines the wake-up sensitivity for the external wake-up source (see External Wake-up on PP1-PP4 and PP6-PP9). The x in the table above has to be replaced by 0 to 9 (PP0 - PP9). 2.15.2 Spike Suppression on Input Pins To avoid metastability when reading the GPIO pins, a synchronization stage is included and a two-stage spike filter suppresses spikes; thus data is available to be read after a delay no greater than 2 system clock periods. Due to the synchronization stage, the following might occur: • • • Signal duration (TSIGNAL) < 1 system clock period (1 TCLK): Signal is suppressed 1 TCLK < TSIGNAL < 2 TCLK: Undefined if suppressed or passed TSIGNAL > 2 TCLK: Signal is available in P1In or P3In register 2.15.3 External Wake-up on PP1-PP4 and PP6-PP9 PP1-PP4 and PP6-PP9 can additionally be used as external wake-up sources. To enable the external wake-ups the appropriate bit in the SFR ExtWUM must be set to 0B and the pin must be configured as input by setting the appropriate bits in P1DIR respectively P3DIR to 1B. The internal pull-up/pull-down resistor is enabled if the appropriate bits in SFR P1OUT respectively in SFR P3OUT are set. SFR P1SENS respectively SFR P3SENS selects the sensitivity (active high/active low). For the settings where the internal pull-up resistor is enabled, a LOW on the appropriate PPx causes a wake-up. When the pulldown resistor is enabled with the appropriate setting a HIGH on PPx causes a wake-up. A logical description of the external wake-ups and the internal pull-up/pull-down resistors is show in Figure 57 “Logical description of external wake-ups and internal pull-up/pull-down resistors” on Page 148. Data Sheet 147 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description VBat Pullup PPSx 0 Pulldown 1 & & GND PPx PPDx PPOx ExtWUM & & >=1 >=1 & & WU & & Figure 57 Logical description of external wake-ups and internal pull-up/pull-down resistors 2.15.4 Alternative Port Functionality In the following table, the alternative port functionality is shown - which has higher priority than standard I/O port functionality. Table 24 I/O Port 1 - Alternative Functionality Pin Function I/O Description PP0 I2C-SCL I I2C Serial Clock Line Configured to I2C clock pin if SFR Bit CFG1.6 [I2CEn] is set. Weak-High has to be provided either by the internal pull-up resistor, by an external pull-up resistor or by the I2C master device. Port Pin I/O I/O Standard I/O port functionality controlled by P1Dir.0, P1Out.0, P1In.0. T0Gate I/O Can be used (alternative to the TMOD.3 [T0Gate]) as enable function for Timer 0 OPMode1 I/O Select operation mode (NORMAL-, DEBUG-, PROGRAMMING MODE) I2C-SDA I/O I2C Serial Data Configured to I2C data pin if bit CFG1.6 [I2CEn] is set. Weak-High has to be provided either by the internal pull-up resistor, by an external pull-up resistor, or by the I2C master device. Port Pin I/O I/O Standard I/O port functionality controlled by P1Dir.1, P1Out.1, P1In.1, P1Sens.1. WU0 I/O Wake-up by external wake-up source. Wake-up functionality in POWER DOWN state when enabled by setting ExtWUM.0 to zero. Wake-up level sensitivity dependent on P1Sens.1 (if set to 0, sensitive on low-level). T0Count I/O Can be used (alternative to CPU clock, TMOD.2[T0C/T]) as source for Timer 0 in counter mode. OPMode2 I/O Select operation mode (NORMAL-, DEBUG-, PROGRAMMING MODE) TxDataOut I/O RF Encoder data output: If bit CFG1.4[RFTXPEN] is set to one, the Manchester/BiPhase encoded data is delivered serially to PP2. Port Pin I/O I/O Standard I/O port functionality controlled by P1Dir.2, P1Out.2, P1In.2, P1Sens.2. WU1 I/O Wake-up by external wake up source. Wake-up functionality in POWER DOWN state when enabled by setting ExtWUM.1 to zero. Wake-up level sensitivity dependent on P1Sens.2 (if set to 0, sensitive on low-level). T3Count I/O Can be used as clock source for Timer 3 when selected via TMOD2.7 - 6 [T3Clk.x]. PP1 PP2 Data Sheet 148 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Table 24 I/O Port 1 - Alternative Functionality (cont’d) Pin Function I/O Description PP3 SPI_CS I/O SPI bus interface chip select Port Pin I/O I/O Standard I/O port functionality controlled by P1Dir.3, P1Out.3, P1In.3, P1Sens.3 WU2 I/O Wake-up by external wake-up source. Wake-up functionality in POWER DOWN state when enabled by setting ExtWUM.2 to zero. Wake-up level sensitivity dependent on P1Sens.3 (if set to 0, sensitive on low-level). SPI_MISO I/O SPI bus interface master in slave out Port Pin I/O I/O Standard I/O port functionality controlled by P1Dir.4, P1Out.4, P1In.4, P1Sens.4 WU3 I/O Wake-up by external wake-up source. Wake-up functionality in POWER DOWN state when enabled by setting ExtWUM.3 to zero. Wake-up level sensitivity dependent on P1Sens.4 (if set to 0 sensitive on low-level). SPI_MOSI I/O SPI bus interface master out slave in Port Pin I/O I/O Standard I/O port functionality controlled by P1Dir.5, P1Out.5, P1In.5, P1Sens.5 SPI_Clk I/O SPI bus interface clock Port Pin I/O I/O Standard I/O port functionality controlled by P1Dir.6, P1Out.6, P1In.6, P1Sens.6 WU4 I/O Wake-up by external wake-up source. Wake-up functionality in POWER DOWN state when enabled by setting ExtWUM.4 to zero. Wake-up level sensitivity dependent on P1Sens.6 (if set to 0, sensitive on low-level). Port Pin I/O I/O Standard I/O port functionality controlled by P1Dir.7, P1Out.7, P1In.7, P1Sens.7 ExtInt1 I/O When enabled by setting IE.2 [EX1], this pin can generate an interrupt event that is sensitive to pin level or falling edge. The separation by level or edge is done via TCON.2 [IT1]. The interrupt flag is TCON3.[IE1]. WU5 I/O Wake-up by external wake-up source. Wake-up functionality in POWER DOWN state when enabled by setting ExtWUM.5 to zero. Wake-up level sensitivity dependent on P1Sens.7 (if set to 0, sensitive on low-level). Port Pin I/O I/O Standard I/O port functionality controlled by P3Dir.0, P3Out.0, P3In.0, P3Sens.0 WU6 I/O Wake-up by external wake-up source. Wake-up functionality in POWER DOWN state when enabled by setting ExtWUM.6 to zero. Wake-up level sensitivity dependent on P3Sens.0 (if set to 0, sensitive on low-level). T1Gate I/O Can be used (alternative to the TMOD.7 [T1Gate]) as enable function for Timer 1 Port Pin I/O I/O Standard I/O port functionality controlled by P3Dir.1, P3Out.1, P3In.1, P3Sens.1 Ext_Int0 I/O When enabled by setting IE.0 [EX0] this pin can generate an interrupt event sensitive on pin level or falling edge. The separation by level or edge is done via TCON.0 [IT0]. The interrupt flag is TCON1.[IE0]. WU7 I/O Wake-up by external wake up source. Wake-up functionality in POWER DOWN state when enabled by setting ExtWUM.7 to zero. Wake-up level sensitivity dependent on P3Sens.1 (if set to 0, sensitive on low-level). T1Count I/O Can be used (alternative to CPU clock, TMOD.6[T1C/T]) as source for Timer 1 in counter mode. PP4 PP5 PP6 PP7 PP8 PP9 Data Sheet 149 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.15.5 Register Description Table 25 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Page Number P1Out IO-Port 1 Data OUT Register 90H UUUUUUUUB 153 P1Dir IO-Port 1 Direction Register 91H UUUUUUUUB 150 P1In IO-Port 1 Data IN Register 92H XXXXXXXXB P1SENS IO-Port 1 Sensitivity Register 93H UUUUUUUUB 154 P3Out IO-Port 3 Data OUT Register B0H 000000UUB 153 P3Dir IO-Port 3 Direction Register EBH 000000UUB 151 P3In IO-Port 3 Data IN Register ECH 000000XXB 152 P3SENS IO-Port 3 Sensitivity Register EDH 000000UUB 155 152 IO-Port 1 Direction Register P1Dir IO-Port 1 Direction Register Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value 91H UUUUUUUUB FFH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PD1_7 PD1_6 PD1_5 PD1_4 PD1_3 PD1_2 PD1_1 PD1_0 rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw Field Bits Type Description PD1_7 7 rw PP7 direction 0B output input 1B PD1_6 6 rw PP6 direction 0B output 1B input PD1_5 5 rw PP5 direction 0B output 1B input PD1_4 4 rw PP4 direction 0B output 1B input PD1_3 3 rw PP3 direction 0B output 1B input Data Sheet 150 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Field Bits Type Description PD1_2 2 rw PP2 direction 0B output 1B input PD1_1 1 rw PP1 direction 0B output 1B input PD1_0 0 rw PP0 direction 0B output 1B input IO-Port 3 Direction Register P3Dir IO-Port 3 Direction Register Offset Wakeup Value EBH 000000UUB 7 2 Res Field Bits Res 7:2 PP9D 1 rw PP9 direction 0B output 1B input PP8D 0 rw PP8 direction 0B output 1B input Data Sheet Type Reset Value 03H 1 0 PP9D PP8D rw rw Description Reserved 151 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description IO-Port 1 Data In Register P1In IO-Port 1 Data IN Register Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value 92H XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PI1_7 PI1_6 PI1_5 PI1_4 PI1_3 PI1_2 PI1_1 PI1_0 r r r r r r r r Field Bits Type Description PI1_7 7 r PP7 Data In PI1_6 6 r PP6 Data In PI1_5 5 r PP5 Data In PI1_4 4 r PP4 Data In PI1_3 3 r PP3 Data In PI1_2 2 r PP2 Data In PI1_1 1 r PP1 Data In PI1_0 0 r PP0 Data In IO-Port 3 Data In Register P3In IO-Port 3 Data IN Register Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value ECH 000000XXB 000000XXB 7 2 Res Field Bits Res 7:2 PI3_1 1 r PP9 Data In PI3_0 0 r PP8 Data In Data Sheet Type 1 0 PI3_1 PI3_0 r r Description Reserved 152 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description IO-Port 1 Data Out Register P1Out IO-Port 1 Data OUT Register Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value 90H UUUUUUUUB FFH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P1_7 P1_6 P1_5 P1_4 P1_3 P1_2 P1_1 P1_0 rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw Field Bits Type Description P1_7 7 rw PP7 Data Out P1_6 6 rw PP6 Data Out P1_5 5 rw PP5 Data Out P1_4 4 rw PP4 Data Out P1_3 3 rw PP3 Data Out P1_2 2 rw PP2 Data Out P1_1 1 rw PP1 Data Out P1_0 0 rw PP0 Data Out IO-Port 3 Data Out Register P3Out IO-Port 3 Data OUT Register Offset Wakeup Value B0H 000000UUB 7 2 Res Field Bits Res 7:2 P3_1 1 rw PP9 Data Out P3_0 0 rw PP8 Data Out Data Sheet Type Reset Value 03H 1 0 P3_1 P3_0 rw rw Description Reserved 153 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description IO-Port 1 Sensitivity Register This register is used select the pull-up / pull-down functionality of the GPIOs. For proper usage of the pull-up / pulldown functionality check the settings of registers P1DIR and P1OUT and see Table 23 “GPIO Port Configuration” on Page 147. P1SENS IO-Port 1 Sensitivity Register Offset Wakeup Value Reset Value 93H UUUUUUUUB 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PS1_7 PS1_6 PS1_5 PS1_4 PS1_3 PS1_2 PS1_1 PS1_0 rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw Field Bits Type Description PS1_7 7 rw PP7 sensitivity 0B Pull-up 1B Pull-down PS1_6 6 rw PP6 sensitivity 0B Pull-up 1B Pull-down PS1_5 5 rw PP5 sensitivity 0B Pull-up 1B Pull-down PS1_4 4 rw PP4 sensitivity 0B Pull-up 1B Pull-down PS1_3 3 rw PP3 sensitivity 0B Pull-up Pull-down 1B PS1_2 2 rw PP2 sensitivity 0B Pull-up 1B Pull-down PS1_1 1 rw PP1 sensitivity 0B Pull-up 1B Pull-down PS1_0 0 rw PP0 sensitivity 0B Pull-up 1B Pull-down Data Sheet 154 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description IO-Port 3 Sensitivity Register This register is used select the pull-up / pull-down functionality of the GPIOs. For proper usage of the pull-up / pulldown functionality check the settings of registers P3DIR and P3OUT and see Table 23 “GPIO Port Configuration” on Page 147. P3SENS Offset Wakeup Value EDH 000000UUB IO-Port 3 Sensitivity Register 7 2 00H 1 0 Res PS3_1 PS3_0 r rw rw Field Bits Type Description Res 7:2 r For future use PS3_1 1 rw PP9 sensitivity 0B Pull-up 1B Pull-down PS3_0 0 rw PP8 sensitivity 0B Pull-up 1B Pull-down Data Sheet Reset Value 155 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.16 I2C Interface For communication between external hardware (like EEPROMs, remote I/O ports, LCD drivers, RAMs...) and the PMA51xx, an I2C master/slave interface is implemented. This interface is compatible to the I2C specification. • • • • • PP1 is used as a Serial Data line (SDA) PP0 is used as a Serial Clock Line (SCL) In Idle Mode the I2C lines are weak high PMA51xx responds to the I2C- Address defined in SFR I2CM (reset value is 6CH) or to a general call if enabled by addressing slave address 00H. General call is enabled by setting SFR bit I2CC.6[GCEn]. The following data transfer rates according to I2C specification can be achieved – Slave Mode: Normal Mode (up to 100kbit/s) and Fast Mode (up to 400 kbit/s) – Master Mode: Normal Mode (up to 100 kbit/s) Note: The I2C interface is used in DEBUG Mode, therefore it must not be reconfigured in DEBUG Mode. Furthermore debugging of the I2C interface itself is not possible and will lead to debugging errors. 2.16.1 Module Structure Figure 58 points out the internal structure of the I2C-module. All activities are controlled by the Control Logic internal Control Finite State Machine (FSM). Control over the I2C bus pins is implemented in block Pin Control, responsible for start and stop bit detection and pin timing. Besides the Control FSM the block Control Logic in addition comprises the communications timing (Timing & Delay) using the Baud rate Counter, the Bit Counter for counting incoming data bits and the Arbitration Logic for multi master operation. The control logic internal FSM is controlled by the control register I2CC. Configuration information is given by the mode register I2CM (device address) and the baud rate register I2CB (determining the working speed of the I2Cbus). To provide information about appearing events and status information the status register I2CS is used. The virtual register I2CD is used to store incoming and outgoing data bytes. Outgoing data bytes are moved from the internal register TX-Buffer to the Shift Register, incoming data bits are collected in the Shift Register and moved to RX-Buffer if a full byte has been received. If an address is received, this byte is compared to the device address in mode register I2CM. SEn I2 CC RBF I2 CS B0 I2 CB A0 PEn RSEn TBF AckEn RnW RAck INP AckDt S OV Res AM SCL Control Logic Control CD Pin level rising falling GCEn I2C Module I2 CM B1 A1 B3 B2 A2 A3 B5 B6 B4 A4 A5 Address Compare A6 Control FSM out_en A7 SDA Baudrate Counter level rising falling B7 out_en Timing & Delay Start Stop Bit Counter Arbitration TX Buffer (D7:0) I2 CD Shift Register Figure 58 Data Sheet RX Buffer ( D7:0) I2C module structure 156 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description I2C Programming Instructions 2.16.2 To enable the I2C-bus interface SFR bit CFG1.6 [I2CEn] has to be set. Further settings has to be done to prepare the I2C-module for master or slave operation. • • • Configure the device by setting register I2CC. General calls can be enabled by setting bit I2CC.6[GCEn], the service request mechanism (polling/interrupt mode) has to be decided via bit I2CC.5[INP]. Enter the device address in mode register I2CM. If no changes are done the I2C-bus matches to the predefined address 6CH. The baud rate register I2CB has to be set according to the used mode and to the demands of transmission speed. In master mode the register has to be set to a maximum transfer rate proportional value. According to the settings and according to the sequence handling mode (polling or interrupt mode) differing programming instructions have to be executed. 2.16.2.1 Slave Mode Sequence (Polling Mode) 2 Once the I C-bus module has been enabled and configured to polling mode by setting bit I2CC.5[INP] to 0B, the I2C interface waits for a start condition to occur. Subsequently the following 8 bits (7 bits address, 1 bit RnW) are shifted into an internal shift register and compared to the internal device address. When the address matches the hardware automatically generates an acknowledge and bit I2CS.7[AM] is set. Together with the address the direction bit RnW is transferred. According to its value (stored in bit I2CS.3[RnW]) different actions has to be set: Receive I2C-data • • • If bit I2CS.0[RBF] is set a data byte has been shifted in and transferred to the internal RX-Data register. The received byte is ready to be read out. An acknowledge is automatically set by hardware as long as no receive buffer overflow (bit I2CS.5[OV] in status register) has occurred. If bit I2CS.4[S] is set a stop condition has occurred and the transmission is closed. If bit I2CS.7[AM] is set a restart condition has been set on I2C-bus and a matching address has been transmitted. In case of a write access a branch to the transmit data subroutine has to be performed. Transmit I2C-data • • In the transmit data subroutine the data to be transmitted first has to be written to register I2CD. I2CS.1[TBF] is set until the byte is transferred to the shift register and transmission is started physically - I2CS.1[TBF] is cleared again and new data can be written to I2CD. If no data byte is provided, the I2C clock line SCL is held low by the slave (the bus is blocked). If bit I2CS.4[S] is set, the transmission process has been terminated by the master and the transmission subroutine may be left. 2.16.2.2 Slave Mode Sequence (Interrupt Mode) Interrupt handling is enabled by setting bit I2CC.5[INP] to 1B. With every interrupt event the software routine restarts at the entry point of the I2C interrupt service routine, so the actual state and the cause for this interrupt has to be identified before continuing with the next step. Compared to the polling mode differing status information are needed for this non sequential handling and should be handled the following way: • • • • If I2CS.4[S] is set to 1B the transfer is still active, otherwise it has been terminated. If I2CS.7[AM] is set, the I2C interface has been addressed as slave device (slave interrupt), otherwise a master interrupt request is pending. If I2CS.6[CD] is set an unexpected start or stop condition has been detected if the device has been addressed as slave device - or if acting as master device a collision has been detected on I2C bus (arbitration). If I2CS.3[RnW] is set, a read sequence is executed and the I2C slave device has to provide data by writing to register I2CD, otherwise a write sequence is executed and data are provided within register I2CD. Data Sheet 157 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description • If a write sequence is executed and I2CS.0[RBF] is set, then the received data can be read from I2CD otherwise the address byte can be read from I2CD to decide whether to handle a general call (if enabled with I2CC.6[GCEn]) or a slave transfer. I2C slave interrupts are generated on following events: • • • • If a general call has been received If data are received and ready to be read out from I2CD. If data have to be transmitted and are required in I2CD. If the transfer has been stopped by a stop condition or by an unexpected start or stop condition. 2.16.2.3 General Call Sequence If a general call address is sent and bit I2CM.6[GCEn] is set the I2C bus behaves like a slave receiver, i.e. a slave mode sequence procedures may be taken. The general call protocol handling has to be done by software. 2.16.2.4 Master Mode Sequence (Polling Mode) After enabling the I2C-bus module the I2C device behaves like a slave. If I2C bus is free of communication a master transfer can be initiated by writing an address byte (including the access direction bit RnW) to I2CD and setting a start condition with bit I2CC.0[SEn]. The start condition and the following address byte is transmitted immediately on SCL and SDA. An existing I2C device with fitting device address will then respond with an acknowledge. If the polling mode was enabled by setting bit I2CC.5[INP] to 0B bit I2CS.3[RAck] will then be set accordingly. Consecutively the master may transmit (write data to I2CD) or receive data (read data from I2CD after reception) according to the transmitted RnW bit. Receive I2C-data After data reception (I2CS.0[RBF] is set) the master has to set an acknowledge. This is done by setting bit I2CC.4[AckEn] and bit I2CC.5[AckDt]. Transmit I2C-data After writing data to register I2CD they are transmitted. If finished the master will be informed with I2CS.3[RAck] if the data have been acknowledged. If no more data are needed to be transmitted/received the master can stop the transfer by setting a stop condition with bit I2CC.3[PEn] - or continue with a new transfer by setting a restart condition with bit I2CC.2[RSEn]. If a stop condition is issued bit I2CS.4[S] is set again. In multi master mode also pay attention to collision detection indicated by bit I2CS.6[CD]. 2.16.2.5 Master Mode Sequence (Interrupt Mode) Contrary to the master mode sequence in polling mode the I2C bus handling in interrupt mode has to be included in the slave mode interrupt sequence due to the non sequential interrupt handling. Nevertheless the master mode sequence has to be started by providing address information in I2CD and a start condition enable by setting bit I2CC.0[SEn]. Handling of the I2C transfer is then done in the interrupt service routine doing the following checks: • • • • If I2CS.4[S] is set to 1B the transfer is still active, otherwise the stop condition has terminated the transfer. If I2CS.7[AM] is set, the I2C interface has been addressed as slave device (slave interrupt), otherwise a master interrupt request is pending. If I2CS.6[CD] is set a collision has been detected on I2C bus (arbitration) and an other master device took over the control. If I2CS.3[RnW] is set, a read sequence has been started and the I2C master device has to read the received data from register I2CD and provide acknowledge information writing I2CC.4[AckDt] and I2CC.3[AckEn]. Data Sheet 158 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description • If I2CS.3[RnW] is not set, a write sequence has been started. According to the received acknowledge information provided by I2CS.2[RAck] data have to be provided by writing register I2CD or transfer has to be terminated generating a stop condition with I2CC.2[PEn] or a restart condition with I2CC.1[RSEn]. I2C master interrupts are generated on following events: • • • • If the I2C device has been addressed a slave interrupt is received (master acting as slave). If a bus collision has occurred. If data (or slave address) has been transmitted. Received acknowledge information can be read and further steps can be decided writing to I2CC. New data to transmit can be provided by writing to I2CD. If data have been received. Acknowledge information should be provided by the master interface and further steps can be decided by writing to I2CC. Data can be read from register I2CD. Data Sheet 159 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.16.3 Register Description Table 26 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Page Number I2CD I2C Data Register 9AH 00H 162 I2CS I2C Status Register 9BH 00H 163 I2CC I2C Control Register A2H 00H 161 I2CM I2C Mode Register A3H 6CH 162 I2CB I2C Baud rate Register B1H 00H 160 I2C Baud rate Register This register is used to control the I2C-bus transmission speed in master mode. In slave mode this register is used to determine the data setup time after SCL hold (delay by slave). The value can be calculated by the equation shown in Figure 59. I 2CB = SCLhigh [ s ] ⋅ ( Figure 59 fSYS [ Hz ] ) −1 2 Calculation of I2C baud rate I2CB I2C Baud rate Register Offset Wakeup Value B1H 00H 7 Reset Value 00H 0 I2CB rw Field Bits Type Description I2CB 7:0 rw I2C Baud rate Register Data transfer rate compliant value for SCL hold time (master behavior) or data setup time after SCL hold (slave behavior). Data Sheet 160 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description I2C Control Register I2CC I2C Control Register Offset Wakeup Value A2H 00H Reset Value 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Res GCEn INP AckDt AckEn PEn RSEn SEn rw rw rw rw rw rw rw Field Bits Res 7 GCEn 6 rw General Call Enable 0B General Call disabled 1B General Call enabled, if bit CFG1.6[I2CEn] is set INP 5 rw Mode selection (interrupt / not polling) Selection of the I2C mode. The behavior of the I2C Status Register (SPIS) changes accordingly. 0B Polling mode 1B Interrupt mode AckDt 4 rw Acknowledge data Provides acknowledge information if acknowledge is set by I2CC.3[AckEn] in master mode. 0B Give a not Acknowledge on incoming data 1B Acknowledge incoming data AckEn 3 rw Acknowledge sequence enable Sets acknowledge information defined in I2CC.4[AckDt] on I2C bus in master mode. This bit is automatically reset by hardware afterwards. 0B Idle 1B Acknowledge data defined in AckDt is sent PEn 2 rw Stop condition enable Initiates a stop condition on the correct position in the transmission frame in master mode. This bit is automatically reset by hardware afterwards. 0B Idle 1B Set stop condition RSEn 1 rw Restart condition enable Initiates a restart condition on the correct position in the transmission frame in master mode. If commonly set with stop condition the stop condition is executed. This bit is automatically reset by hardware afterwards. 0B Idle 1B Set restart condition Data Sheet Type Description Reserved 161 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Field Bits Type Description SEn 0 rw Start condition enable Initiates a start condition on the correct position in the transmission frame in master mode. This bit is automatically reset by hardware afterwards. 0B Idle 1B Set start condition I2C Data Register RX-Buffer and TX-Buffer are two data transmission registers that are accessible by the virtual register I2CD. If read, the content of the RX-Buffer is provided, if written the TX-Buffer is filled. I2CD I2C Data Register Offset Wakeup Value 9AH 00H Reset Value 00H 7 0 I2CD rw Field Bits Type Description I2CD 7:0 rw I2C Data Register Provide access to TX-Buffer if written and RX-Buffer if read. I2C Mode Register This register is used to set the I2C address of the PMA51xx. I2CM I2C Mode Register Offset Wakeup Value A3H 6CH 7 6CH 1 0 A7_1 Res rw r Field Bits Type Description A7_1 7:1 rw I2C Address bit 7 down to bit_1 Res 0 r I2C Address Bit 0 This bit is fixed to 0B Data Sheet Reset Value 162 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description I2C Status Register I2CS I2C Status Register Offset Wakeup Value 9BH 00H Reset Value 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AM CD OV S RnW RAck TBF RBF rc rc rc rc r r r r Field Bits Type Description AM 7 rc Address matched / Slave transfer Polling mode (I2CC.5[INP] is set to 0B): Set if received device address matches with received address byte (corresponding to 7-bit or 10-bit addressing mode). Interrupt mode (I2CC.5[INP] is set to 1B): Set while PMA51xx has been addressed as slave device. This bit is automatically reset by hardware when the transfer is stopped. 0B Idle 1B Address matched (polling) / Slave transfer (interrupt) CD 6 rc Collision detected If master transfer is executed, this bit is set if a collision was detected. If a slave transfer is executed, this bit is set if an unexpected start/stop condition occurs during address/data transfer. 0B Idle 1B Collision detected OV 5 rc Overflow Set if new data have been received and old data in the RX-Buffer (I2CD register) were not read. Set if data are still pending in the TX-Buffer when new data are written into I2CD. 0B Idle 1B Buffer overflow detected S 4 rc Stop bit detected / Transfer active Polling mode (I2CC.5[INP] is set to 0B): Set if stop condition has been detected. Interrupt mode (I2CC.5[INP] is set to 1B): Set as long as an ongoing transfer is detected. 0B Idle 1B Stop bit detected (polling) / ongoing transfer (interrupt) RnW 3 r Read / not write bit information Contains the type of transfer. If master transfer is executed this bit is automatically captured on sending the address. If a slave transfer is executed this bit is captured on receiving the address. 0B Write transfer (slave-receiver / master-transmitter) 1B Read transfer (slave-transmitter / master-receiver) Data Sheet 163 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Field Bits Type Description RAck 2 r Received acknowledge level Contains the level of the received acknowledge. 0B Received NOT acknowledge (nACK) 1B Received acknowledge (ACK) TBF 1 r Transmit buffer full Set if register I2CD is written. Cleared by hardware if the TX-Buffer is moved to the shift register, thus the data byte is transmitted. 0B Transmit buffer empty 1B Transmit buffer full RBF 0 r Receive buffer full Set if the content from the shift register is moved to the RX-Buffer, thus data byte is received. Cleared by hardware if register I2CD is read. 0B Receive buffer empty 1B Receive buffer full Data Sheet 164 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.17 SPI Interface The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) is a very simple synchronous interface to transfer data on a serial bus, connecting an intelligent master controller with general-purpose slave circuits such as slave controller, RAMs, memories, and so on. A simple 2-wire (half-duplex mode) or 3-wire (full-duplex mode) bus is used for communication. • • • • • • • • • • High-speed synchronous data transfer Four programmable bit rates through prescaler 2-wire bus for half-duplex transmission; a serial clock line (SPI_Clk) and concatenated data line (SPI_MISO,SPI_MOSI) 3-wire bus for full-duplex transmission; a serial clock line (SPI_Clk) and two serial data lines (SPI_MISO,SPI_MOSI) A 4-wire bus for full-duplex transmission plus handshaking can be implemented by also utilizing the Chip Select (SPI_CS). This pin can be used for indicating the beginning of a new byte sequence. Master or Slave Operation Clock Control - Polarity (idle low/high) and phase (sample data with rising/falling clock edge) are programmable Bit Width (1 to 8 bits) and Bit Order (MSB or LSB first) are configurable Compatible with SSC (High-Speed Synchronous Serial Interface) and standard SPI interfaces Protocol is defined by software 2.17.1 SPI Functionality The basic interaction principle between master and slave SPI devices is shown in Figure 60. Writing to the SPI shift register of the master SPI device starts the SPI clock generation (line SCK). The two 8 bit shift registers in master and slave device can be considered as one distributed circular shift register (including line MISO and MOSI). When data is shifted from the master to the slave with the generated clock, data is also shifted in the opposite direction simultaneously. During one shift cycle, data in the master and the slave is interchanged resulting a full duplex transmission. SPI Master Device 8 bit Shift- Register SPI ClockGen Figure 60 SPI Slave Device MISO MISO MISO MOSI MOSI MOSI SCK SCK SCK 8 bit Shift-Register SPI principle Different SPI devices are connected through three lines. The definition of these lines is always determined by the master. The line connected to the master's data output is the transmit line MOSI1), the receive line is connected to its data input line MISO2). The serial clock is distributed over line SCK3). Only the device selected for master operation generates and outputs the serial clock. All slaves receive and react to this clock. 1) MOSI = Master Out Slave In 2) MISO = Master In Slave Out 3) SCK = Serial clock Data Sheet 165 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description The output of the master's shift register is connected to the external transmit line, which in turn is connected to the slaves' shift register input (MOSI). The output of the slaves' shift register is connected to the external receive line in order to enable the master to receive the data shifted out of one slave (MISO). The external connections are hard-wired, the function and direction of the pins are determined by configuration as master- or slave device. When initializing the devices select only one device for master operation, all others must be programmed for slave operation. Initialization includes the operating mode (clock phase, clock polarity, data byte order, bit width and transfer rate). To deselect the actual master (slave-select functionality) and re-establish connection with another master, a corresponding protocol has to be fulfilled by software using an additional free port pin. To avoid collisions on line MISO due to several slave devices, only one slave is allowed to pull the line to low (wired AND connection), i.e. enables the driver of its pin. Only this slave can put its data onto the master's receive line and only receiving of data from the master is possible. The master selects the slave device from which it expects data either by separate select lines (free port lines), or by using a suitable protocol to tell all the other slave devices to only output state high on line MISO. According to the hard-wired connection, two different operation modes are possible - Full-Duplex and Half-Duplex operation. 2.17.1.1 Full-Duplex Operation The master device line MOSI (master out) is connected to line MOSI of all slave devices (slave in). Accordingly line MISO is connected between master and slave devices. Additionally to this two data lines the clock line SCK has to be wired respectively. This way data are transmitted across a 3-wire bus in full duplex mode (refer to Figure 61). Data bytes are transmitted from master to slave and simultaneously from slave to master. Device #1 MOSI MISO MISO SCK SCK Clock SPI ClockGen MOSI Transmit SPI Shift Register Device #2 Slave Receive Master SPI Shift Register SPI ClockGen Slave MOSI Device #3 SPI Shift Register MISO SCK Figure 61 Data Sheet SPI ClockGen Full-Duplex configuration 166 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.17.1.2 Half-Duplex Operation In a Half-Duplex configuration only one data line is necessary for both receiving and transmitting data. Figure 62 shows, that line MISO and MOSI of each master and slave device is shortened to one data line. The clock line SCK is connected exclusively. The master device controls the data transfer by generating the shift clock, while the slave device receives it. Device #1 SPI Shift Register MOSI MOSI MISO MISO SCK SCK Clock SPI ClockGen Device #2 Slave Common Transmit Receive line Master SPI Shift Register SPI ClockGen Slave MOSI Device #3 SPI Shift Register MISO SCK Figure 62 SPI ClockGen Half-Duplex Configuration Due to the fact that all transmit and receive pins are connected to one data line, an appropriate protocol has to be used to avoid collisions, i.e. only one device (master or slave) may transmit data unidirectional, all other (arbitrary) devices are only allowed to receive these data (therefore the shift register has to contain FFH). Because line MISO and MOSI of each device is shortened, the transmitting device will clock its own data at the input pin. By these means any corruptions on the common data exchange line are detected. Data Sheet 167 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.17.1.3 Data Modes There are four combinations of SCK phase and polarity with respect to serial data, which is determined by control bits SPIC.2[CPHA] and SPIC.3[CPOL] (refer to Figure 63). Additionally the data order (bit SPIC.5[DORD]) (MSBfirst or LSB-first) and the data width (bit SPIM.2:0[DWS]) (variable from 1 to 8 bits) may be changed. SPI Transfer Mode 0 (Format with CPOL=1, CPHA=1, DORD=1) SCK Cycle # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 next byte Chip Select end of transfer SCK (CPOL=1) MOSI (from master) MSB MISO (from slave) MSB 6 5 4 3 2 1 LSB 6 5 4 3 2 1 LSB * SPI Transfer Mode 2 (Format with CPOL=0, CPHA=1, DORD=1) SCK Cycle # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 next byte Chip Select end of transfer SCK (CPOL=0) MOSI (from master) MSB MISO (from slave) MSB 6 5 4 3 2 1 LSB 6 5 4 3 2 1 LSB * SPI Transfer Mode 1 (Format with CPOL=1, CPHA=0, DORD=1) SCK Cycle # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 next byte Chip Select end of transfer SCK (CPOL=1) MOSI (from master) MISO (from slave) * MSB 6 5 4 3 2 1 MSB 6 5 4 3 2 1 LSB LSB SPI Transfer Mode 3 (Format with CPOL=0, CPHA=0, DORD=1) 1 SCK Cycle # 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 next byte Chip Select end of transfer SCK (CPOL=0) MOSI (from master) MISO (from slave) Figure 63 Data Sheet * MSB 6 5 4 3 2 1 MSB 6 5 4 3 2 1 LSB LSB SPI data modes 168 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.17.2 Module Structure Figure 64 points out the main blocks inside the SPI module. The Pin Control block separates and assigns incoming and outgoing SPI signals. According to this signals and the configurations done in SPI control register (SPIC) and SPI mode register (SPIM) the SPI Control block coordinates Shift Register shift-in and shift-out. The Clock Control block is only relevant in SPI master mode: the SPI clock is generated by the internal baud rate timer. The baud rate timer is a 8 bit down counter, its overrun toggles the SPI clock. Transmit Buffer and Receive Buffer are used to store incoming and outgoing data bytes. Outgoing data bytes are first transferred from Transmit Buffer to the Shift Register that dispenses bit by bit in compliance to the data order (MSB or LSB first) set by bit SPIC.5[DORD]. At start of a frame 2 bytes can be written into the TX buffer. First is moved through TX buffer into Shift register. Second byte is hold in TX buffer until first byte was sent. Incoming data bits are collected in the Shift Register. If all bits are received - the exact amount is defined by SPIM.2-0[DWS2-0] - the whole byte is moved to Receive Buffer. level rising falling Shift Register MISO out_en level rising Transmit Buffer Reg . Receive Buffer Reg . falling Clock out_en rising falling Clock Control SCK out_en Clock Phase Clock Polarity SPI Enable Master/Slave level rising SCS falling Data Order Bit Width PIN Control MOSI SPI Control SPI Control Reg . SPI Mode Reg . SPI Status Reg . interrupt SPI Baud Rate Reg . SPI Baud Rate Timer data bus Figure 64 SPI module structure 2.17.3 Interrupt Support Six events generates an interrupt. First three sources are normal operating interrupts, last three are failures: • • • • • Receive Buffer Full (SPIS.1[SRBF]) and Reload TX buffer as one single event because of SPI behavioral. Chip select (SPI_CS) detected (SPIS.3[SCSD]) (Slave Mode only). Chip select (SPI_CS) lost and the last word was transferred completely (Slave Mode only). Receive Buffer Overrun (SPIS.7[SRE]) (data lost) detected. Phase Error detected (SPIS.5[SPE]). Data Sheet 169 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description • Slave Communication Corrupt detected (SPIS.4[SSCC]). In this case the Slave Select was lost within a word (Slave Mode only). All these interrupt source bits are located in the status register (SPIS) and will be cleared on read access. A read access to status register acknowledges the interrupt. It is not possible to mask one or more of these interrupt sources individually, only all SPI interrupts can be masked by setting SFR bit IE.5 [ESPI] to 0B. 2.17.4 SPI Programming Instructions To enable the SPI-bus interface bit CFG1.2[SPIEn] has to be set. Resume with setting correct configuration in control and mode register (SPIC and SPIM). 2.17.4.1 Slave Mode Sequence Once the SPI interface has been enabled, configured as slave, and selected via chip select (SPI_CS/PP3), it waits for incoming data, which are shifted-in synchronously to the delivered SPI clock. There are two possibilities to select the slave: 1. The SPI slave is selected by the master via an hard-wired signal connected to SPI_CS/PP3. 2. The SPI slave sets the chip select to 0B by setting PP3 direction to output and PP3 to 0B. After all bits has been transmitted, bit SPIS.1[SRBF] is set and the data can be read out from register SPID. If data should be (according to the realized protocol) transmitted simultaneously to the next incoming data byte, simply write the desired byte to the SPI data register SPID. 2.17.4.2 Master Mode Sequence After enabling the SPI interface and configuration as master device it waits for further actions. Data are transmitted/received as soon as the SPI data register SPID is written. If more than one data byte has to be transmitted keep in mind to check bit SPIS.0[STBF] to not overwrite the old data byte. In full duplex mode data bytes are simultaneously received from slave devices. If a byte has to be read according to the implemented protocol simply check bit SPIS.1 [SRBF] in status register and read out the received value from register SPID. 2.17.5 Register Description Table 27 Registers Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Wakeup Value Page Number SPIB SPI Baud rate Register F3H 00H 171 SPIC SPI Control Register F4H 00H 172 SPID SPI Data Register F5H 00H 173 SPIM SPI Mode Register F6H 00H 173 SPIS SPI Status Register F7H 41H 175 Data Sheet 170 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description SPI Baud rate Register The internal baud rate timer is needed only in master mode. It is implemented as 8-bit down counter. The Register SPIB holds counter’s reload value. A underrun from 00H to FFH initiates both timer reload and a SPI clock event. This SPI clock event generates either a rising or falling edge on the SPI clock line. For a full SPI clock cycle two SPI clock events are necessary. The baud rate can be calculated by the formula shown in Figure 65. ⎛ f [ Hz ] ⎞ ⎟⎟ fSPI [ Hz ] = ⎜⎜ SYS ⎝ (SPIB + 1) ⋅ 2 ⎠ Figure 65 Calculation of SPI baud rate All reload values for SPIB from 00H to FFH are valid. SPIB SPI Baud rate Register Offset Wakeup Value F3H 00H 7 Reset Value 00H 0 SPIB w Field Bits Type Description SPIB 7:0 w SPI Baud rate Register Reload value for baud rate timer Data Sheet 171 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description SPI Control Register SPIC SPI Control Register Offset Wakeup Value F4H 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 Res CSEn DORD MSTR CPOL CPHA rw rw rw rw rw 00H 1 0 Res Field Bits Res 7 CSEn 6 rw Chip select enable (slave mode only) Resets the internal FSM if CS is lost during transmission in slave mode. 0B Disable SPI chip select 1B Enable SPI chip select DORD 5 rw Data order Defines the bit order for transmission. 0B LSB is transmitted first 1B MSB is transmitted first MSTR 4 rw Master/Slave select Defines if the module operates as master or slave device. 0B Slave (controls SPI_MISO) 1B Master (controls SPI_MOSI, SPI_Clk) CPOL 3 rw Clock polarity selection Defines the initial state of SPI clock line. 0B Idle clock line is low and leading clock edge is a low to high transition. 1B Idle clock line is high and leading clock edge is a high to low transition. CPHA 2 rw Clock phase selection Determines whether data are active with rising or falling edge of SPI clock line. 0B Transmission starts without a rising or falling edge on SPI clock. With first edge detected the first data bit is latched, with the following edge data are shifted. 1B A rising or falling edge is generated on SPI clock line before data are set. With the following clock edge data are latched before shifted on with consecutive one. Res 1:0 Data Sheet Type Reset Value Description Reserved Reserved 172 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description SPI Data Register SPID SPI Data Register Offset Wakeup Value F5H 00H Reset Value 00H 7 0 SPID rw Field Bits Type Description SPID 7:0 rw SPI Data Register Read from RX buffer and write to TX buffer SPI Mode Register SPIM SPI Mode Register 7 6 5 Res FL rw Offset Wakeup Value F6H 00H 4 3 ALGN Res rw Reset Value 00H 2 0 DWS rw Field Bits Type Description FL 7 rw SPI force level Select output mode for SPI lines SPI_MISO, SPI_MOSI and SPI_Clk. 0B SPI lines are pull-up driven weak high level 1B SPI lines are active driven high level Res 6:5 ALGN 4 Res 3 Data Sheet Reserved rw Data alignment Defines the bit alignment for SPI transmission. This is only relevant in case, data width selection is not 8 bits (see DWS). 0B Right align 1B Left align Reserved 173 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Field Bits Type Description DWS 2:0 rw Data width selection Defines the number of transmitted bits per byte. 000B 8 bits 001B 1 bit 010B 2 bits 011B 3 bits 100B 4 bits 101B 5 bits 110B 6 bits 111B 7 bits Data Sheet 174 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description SPI Status Register SPIS SPI Status Register Offset Wakeup Value F7H 41H Reset Value 41H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SRE STE SPE SSCC SCSD SCSL SRBF STBE rc r rc rc rc rc rc r Field Bits Type Description SRE 7 rc SPI receive error Is set by hardware if a new data frame is completely received but the previous data was not read out from the receive data buffer SPID (data will be overwritten). This bit acts as interrupt request flag. It is cleared by hardware on read access. 0B Normal state 1B Error occurred STE 6 r SPI transmission completed This bit is set if the SPI transmission has been completed. 0B Transmission running 1B Transmission completed SPE 5 rc SPI phase error Is set by hardware if the incoming data at pin MISO (master mode) respectively MOSI (slave mode) sampled with CPU clock, changes between 1 sample before and 2 samples after latching edge of the clock signal. This bit acts as interrupt request flag. It is cleared by hardware on read access. 0B Normal state 1B Phase error detected SSCC 4 rc SPI Slave communication corrupted Set by hardware if the chip select is lost during transmission (in slave mode only). This bit acts as interrupt request flag. It is cleared by hardware on read access. 0B Normal state 1B Transmission corrupted SCSD 3 rc SPI chip select detected Set by hardware in slave mode only if an falling edge is detected on SPICS pin (SPI transmission start). This bit acts as interrupt request flag. It is cleared by hardware on read access. 0B Inactive 1B Chip select detected (falling edge on chip select detected) Data Sheet 175 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description Field Bits Type Description SCSL 2 rc SPI chip select lost Set by hardware in slave mode if a rising edge is detected on SPI-CS. This bit acts as interrupt request flag. It is cleared by hardware on read access. 0B Inactive 1B Chip select lost (rising edge on chip select detected) SRBF 1 rc SPI receive buffer full Is set by hardware if a data byte is received completely. The receive buffer (SPID) is ready to be read. This bit acts as interrupt request flag. It is cleared by hardware on read access. 0B No new data in receive buffer 1B New data in receive buffer STBE 0 r SPI transmit buffer empty Is reset by hardware if register SPID is written and automatically set if data byte is transferred to SPI internal shift register. 0B There are still data in transmit buffer 1B Transmit buffer is empty Data Sheet 176 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.18 PROGRAMMING Mode Operation In PROGRAMMING mode, the PMA51xx is accessible as a slave using the I²C Interface. The device uses the internal 12 MHz RC HF oscillator as its clock source. To avoid programming failures, all PROGRAMMING mode commands are protected by a 16-bit CRC at the end of each command (Chapter 2.12 shows details about the CRC polynomial used). The checksum has to be calculated over all bytes in the command excluding the PMA51xx I²C device address. Figure 66 “Legend for I2C-Commands in PROGRAMMING mode” on Page 177 shows the legend used for the description of the I2C commands. PROGRAMMING mode Commands • • • • • • FLASH Write Line FLASH Erase FLASH Check Erase Status FLASH Read Line FLASH Set Lockbyte 3 FLASH Read Status from programmer to PMA S start condition from PMA to programmer P stop condition CRCH MSB of CRC checksum CRCL SR restart condition or stop / start condition LSB of CRC checksum A acknowledge Data0-31 data which is written into / read from FLASH Pause Time where no communication is allowed Status nA not acknowledge Sector selection of the sector Status byte Figure 66 Legend for I2C-Commands in PROGRAMMING mode 2.18.1 FLASH Write Line The FLASH Write Line command writes 32 bytes to the FLASH. The FLASH Code Sector and FLASH User Data Sectors can be written using this command. The start address has to be a multiple of 20H. As shown in Figure 12 FLASH address range 4000H to 587FH is accessible. This command should only be used if the FLASH line is fully erased. If an already programmed FLASH line gets overwritten (without being erased first) the resulting data is undefined. After the stop condition (P) is received the data is programmed into the FLASH. During the programming time incoming I2C commands are not acknowledged. Programming time is specified in Table 46. Figure 67 shows the structure of the FLASH Write Line command. It is important to note that no type of verification is performed after a write. In order to see if this write command was successful, a Read Status command must be issued, or a FLASH Read Line command may be used to read back the stored values. Note: 1. If transferring the start address, the lower 5 bits are cleared automatically. 2. If less than 36 data bytes are received, nothing is written into the FLASH. The Read Status command can be used to check an invalid command length error. 3. If an already written section in the FLASH gets re-written (without being erased before), the resulting data is undefined. Data Sheet 177 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 4. After the stop condition (P) is received the data is programmed into the FLASH. During the programming time incoming I2C commands are not acknowledged. S 6CH A AddrHi A AddrLo A Data0 A ... Figure 67 FLASH Write Line command 2.18.2 FLASH Read Line A Data31 A CRCH A CRCL A P The contents of the FLASH memory (4000H to 587FH) can be read out via the I2C interface. Figure 68 shows the structure of the FLASH read line command. S 6C H A AddrHi A AddrLo A SR 6D H A Data0 A Figure 68 FLASH Read Line command 2.18.3 FLASH Erase ... A Data31 A CRCH A CRCL nA P The FLASH Erase command is show in Figure 69 and can be used to erase the Code Sector and the User Data Sectors. The FLASH Erase time is specified in Table 46. Figure 70 and Table 28 describe the bits of the Sector byte. Note: After the stop condition (P) is received the selected FLASH sectors are being erased. During the erase time incoming I2C commands are not acknowledged. S 6C H Figure 69 A A2H A Sector A CRCH A CRCL A P FLASH Erase command 7 don’t care Figure 70 FLASH Erase: Sector byte Table 28 FLASH Erase: Sector byte Bits Field Description 2 UDSec II 0B: don’t erase User Data Sector II 1B: erase whether User Data Sector II is erased 1 UDSec I 0B: don’t erase User Data Sector I 1B: erase whether User Data Sector I is erased 0 CSec 0B: don’t erase Code Sector 1B: erase whether Code Sector is erased Data Sheet 178 2 1 0 UDSec II UDSec I CSec Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.18.4 FLASH Check Erase Status This function returns the status of the selected FLASH sector(s). The time required for checking the sectors depends on the selected sectors. The structure of the I2C command FLASH Check Erase Status is shown in Figure 71. Figure 72 and Table 29 describe the bits of the Sector byte. The Status byte is illustrated in Figure 73 and Table 30. Note: After the first stop condition (P) is received the selected FLASH sectors are checked. During this time incoming I2C commands are not acknowledged. S 6C H A A3H A Sector A CRCH A CRCL A P Pause S 6DH A Status A CRCH A CRCL nA P > 35ms Figure 71 FLASH Check Erase Status command 7 don’t care Figure 72 FLASH Check Erase Status: Sector byte Table 29 FLASH Check Erase Status: Sector byte Bits Field Description 2 UDSec II 0B: don’t check User Data Sector II 1B: check whether User Data Sector II is erased 1 UDSec I 0B: don’t check User Data Sector I 1B: check whether User Data Sector I is erased 0 CSec 0B: don’t check Code Sector 1B: check whether Code Sector is erased 7 don’t care Figure 73 FLASH Check Erase Status: Status byte Table 30 FLASH Check Erase Status: Status byte Bits Field Description 2 UDSec II 0B: User Data Sector II is erased or untested 1B: at least one bit is set in User Data Sector II 1 UDSec I 0B: User Data Sector I is erased or untested 1B: at least one bit is set in User Data Sector I 0 CSec 0B: Code Sector is erased or untested 1B: at least one bit is set in Code Sector 2.18.5 2 1 0 UDSec II UDSec I CSec 2 1 0 UDSec II UDSec I CSec FLASH Set Code Lock (Lockbyte 2) To set Lockbyte 2 D1H has to be written to FLASH address 577FH (top address of Code Sector). After the Lockbyte 2 is set, a startup in DEBUG or PROGRAMMING mode is not possible any more. Note: To activate the Code Sector Lock the PMA51xx has to be reset after Lockbyte D1H has been set. Data Sheet 179 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.18.6 FLASH Set User Data Sector Lock (Lockbyte 3) This command sets the Lockbyte for FLASH User Data Sectors I + II. Note: It is required to set Code Sector Lock (Lockbyte 2) to enable User Data Sector Lock (Lockbyte 3) to become effective. Note: To activate the User Data Sector Lock (Lockbyte 3) the PMA51xx has to be reset after setting the Lockbytes for User Data Sector and Code Sector. S 6CH A A1H A CRCH A CRCL Figure 74 FLASH Set Lockbyte 3 command 2.18.7 Read Status A P This function is intended to read out the status of the previous executed functions (pass/fail). It can be called whenever desired to verify if there were errors since the last Read status call. Figure 76 and Table 31 describe the bits of the Status byte. S 6CH A A4H A CRCH A CRCL A P Pause S 6DH A Status A CRCH A CRCL nA P > 9µs Figure 75 Read Status command 7 4 3 CmdCnt Figure 76 Read Status: Status byte Table 31 Read Status: Status byte 2 ErrCnt 1 0 InvCmdL CRCFail Bits Field Description 7:4 CmdCnt Number of executed commands since the first detected error. 1111B: 15 commands or more 1110B: 14 commands ... 0001B: 1 command 0000B: error occurred in last command 3:2 ErrCnt Erroneous events since the last Read status call. 11B: three or more errors 10B: two errors 01B: one error 00B: no error 1 InvCmdL 1B: Invalid command length or execution fail since the last Read status call 0B: Command length and execution correct since the last Read status call 0 CRCFail 1B: CRC Failure detected since the last Read status call 0B: no CRC Error occurred since the last Read status call Data Sheet 180 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.19 DEBUG Mode Operation Debugging of the PMA is done via the I2C interface, therefore the I2C interface must not be reconfigured in DEBUG Mode. Furthermore debugging of the I2C interface itself is not possible and will lead to debugging errors. Note: The FLASH is protected against write access in DEBUG mode. RAM area EBH - FFH is used by the Debugger and must not contain any application code when PMA is used in DEBUG mode. 2.19.1 ROM Debug Function The debug function mainly consists of a debug handler and a single stepper. The debug handler processes the I2C communication and debug command interpretation. The debug commands SetSFR, ReadSFR, SetData, ReadData and SetPC, ReadPC are executed directly by the debug handler. The debug commands Single Step, Run Interruptible and Run until Breakpoint are executed by the single stepper. The single stepper fetches the current opcode and enables opcode execution depending on the debug command. 2.19.2 DEBUG Mode Commands In DEBUG mode the PMA51xx is accessible as a slave using the I2C interface. Figure 77 shows the legend used for the description of the I2C commands. from debugger to PMA S start condition from PMA to debugger P stop condition PCL Program counter low byte PCH Program counter high byte BPL Break point low byte BPH Break point high byte SR restart condition or stop / start condition A acknowledge nA not acknowledge Addr SFR / idata / xdata address Time where no comunication is allowed Pause Data Data byte read from / written to SFR / idata / xdata 2 Figure 77 Legend for I C communication in DEBUG 2.19.2.1 Set SFR Set an SFR to a user-defined value. S 6CH A Figure 78 00H A Addr A Data A P Set SFR command Addr: Address of SFR to be set. Data: Byte value that is written into the SFR address specified by Addr. Data Sheet 181 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.19.2.2 Read SFR Read the value of one SFR. S 6CH A 03H A Addr A P Pause S 6DH A Data nA P > 9 µs Figure 79 Read SFR command Addr: Address of SFR to be read. Data: Byte value that is read from the SFR at address specified by Addr. 2.19.2.3 Set IData Set one byte in the internal data memory (RAM) to a user-defined value. S 6CH A Figure 80 06H A Addr A Data A P Set IData command Addr: Address of the internal data memory to be set (Range: 00H - FFH). Data: Byte value that is written into the internal data memory at address specified by Addr. 2.19.2.4 Read IData Read one byte of the internal data memory (RAM). S 6C H A 09H A Addr A P Pause S 6DH A Data nA P > 9 µs Figure 81 Read IData command Addr: Address of the internal data memory to be read (Range: 00H - FFH). Data: Byte value that is read from the internal data memory at address specified by Addr. 2.19.2.5 Set XData Set one byte in the external data memory (battery buffered data RAM) to a user-defined value. S 6CH A Figure 82 1BH A Addr A Data A P Set XData command Addr: Address of the external data memory to be set (Range: 00H - 0FH). Data: Byte value that is written into the external data memory at address specified by Addr. Data Sheet 182 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.19.2.6 Read XData Read one byte of the external data memory (battery buffered data RAM). S 6CH A 1EH A Addr A P Pause S 6DH A Data nA P > 9 µs Figure 83 Read XData command Addr: Address of the external data memory to be read (Range: 00H - 0FH). Data: Byte value that is read from the external data memory at address specified by Addr. 2.19.2.7 Set PC Set the Program Counter to a user-defined value. S 6CH A Figure 84 0CH A PCH A PCL A P Set PC command PCL: MSB of the new Program Counter. PCH: LSB of the new Program Counter. 2.19.2.8 Read PC Reads the Program Counter. S 6CH A 0FH A P Pause S 6DH A PCH A PCL nA P > 9 µs Figure 85 Read PC command PCL: MSB of the actual Program Counter. PCH: LSB of the actual Program Counter. 2.19.2.9 Single Step Execute one opcode instruction and return to the debug handler. Note: A Library function can not be single stepped and is stepped through automatically until the FLASH is reentered. S 6CH Figure 86 A 12H A P Single Step 2.19.2.10 Run Interruptible The function consists of device internal consecutive single steps until any I2C command is received on the bus. Compared to running the program in real time this function has a slower execution speed by a factor of about 1/50, dependent on the executed program. S 6C H Figure 87 Data Sheet A 15H A P Run Interruptible 183 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Functional Description 2.19.2.11 Run until Breakpoint The debugged program is executed without single steps in real time. This enables debugging of runtime critical functions like RF-Transmission or LF data receiving. The execution is stopped when the PC matches the defined breakpoint. Note: If the breakpoint is not hit the communication to the debugger is lost. S 6CH A Figure 88 Data Sheet 18H A BPH A BPL A P Run until Breakpoint 184 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Reference 3 Reference 3.1 Electrical Data 3.1.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Attention: Stresses above the max. values listed here may cause permanent damage to the device. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. Maximum ratings are absolute ratings; exceeding only one of these values may cause irreversible damage to the integrated circuit. Attention: Test ■ means that the parameter is not subject to production test. It was verified by design/characterization. Table 32 Absolute Maximum Ratings Parameter Symbol Values Min. Typ. Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number ■ Max. Supply Voltage VBat -0.3 +4.0 V Operating Temperature Tj -40 +125 °C ESD HBM integrity VHBM 2 kV All pins ■ According to ESD Standard JEDEC EIA / JESD22-A114-B 1.3 Latch up ILU -100 +100 mA EIA JESD78A 1.4 Input voltage at digital input pins VInDigital -0.3 VBat+0.3 V 1.5 LF Receiver input voltage VInLF -0.3 +0.3 V 1.6 Input and output current for digital I/O pins IIOmax 4 mA Less than 10 mA on all digital ■ pins 1.7 LF Receiver input current ILFIN 4 mA ■ 1.8 ■ 1.9 ■ 1.10 XTAL input voltage VInXT Storage Temperature Data Sheet Ts -0.3 -40 1.2 ■ VREG+0.3 V 1) +150 °C 185 1.1 1) Max 1000 hours accumulated over lifetime Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Reference 3.1.2 Operating Range Within the operational range the IC operates as explained in the circuit description. Table 33 Operating Range Parameter Symbol Values Min. Supply voltage Ambient temperature range 3.1.3 Typ. Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number Max. VBat1 2.1 3.6 V Temperature sensor, LF Receiver and FLASH programming 2.1 VBat2 1.9 3.6 V Every module which is not mentioned at 2.1 (VBat1) 2.2 Tamb -40 125 °C Normal operation 2.4 TFLC 0 85 °C FLASH code sector programming 2.5 TFLD -40 85 °C FLASH data sector programming 2.6 Product Characteristics Product characteristics involve the spread of values guaranteed within the specified voltage and ambient temperature range. Typical characteristics are the median of the production. Supply voltage: Vbat = 1.9V ... 3.6V, unless otherwise specified Ambient temperature: Tamb = -40°C ... +125°C, unless otherwise specified 3.1.3.1 Temperature Sensor Table 34 Temperature Sensor Characteristics Parameter Symbol Values Min. Typ. Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number Max. Measurement error TError -3 +3 °C T = -20 ... 70°C ■ 3.1 Measurement error -5 +5 °C T = Tj ■ 3.2 3.1.3.2 Battery Sensor Table 35 Battery Sensor Characteristics Parameter Symbol Values Min. Measurement error VError Data Sheet -100 Typ. Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number Max. 100 mV 186 ■ 4.1 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Reference 3.1.3.3 Supply Currents Table 36 Supply Currents Parameter Symbol Values Min. Typ. Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number ■ 5.1 ■ 5.2 ■ 5.3 ■ 5.4 ■ 5.5 ■ 5.6 ■ 5.7 ■ 5.8 ■ 5.9 ■ 5.10 ■ 5.11 ■ 5.12 ■ 5.13 ■ 5.14 ■ 5.15 ■ 5.16 ■ 5.17 ■ 5.18 ■ 5.19 ■ 5.20 ■ 5.21 ■ 5.22 ■ 5.23 ■ 5.24 ■ 5.25 ■ 5.26 ■ 5.27 ■ 5.28 ■ 5.29 ■ 5.30 ■ 5.31 ■ 5.32 ■ 5.33 Max. Supply Current RF Transmission FSK modulation I5dBm 9,7 mA I8dBm 12,2 mA I10dBm 12,8 mA Supply Current RF Transmission FSK modulation I5dBm 9,9 mA I8dBm 12,3 mA I10dBm 13,8 mA Supply Current RF Transmission FSK modulation I5dBm 11,8 mA I8dBm 12,9 mA I10dBm 16,9 mA Supply Current RF Transmission FSK modulation I5dBm 12,6 mA I8dBm 15,3 mA I10dBm 17,1 mA Supply Current RF Transmission FSK modulation I5dBm 8,9 mA I8dBm 11 mA I10dBm 12 mA Supply Current RF Transmission FSK modulation I5dBm 9,2 mA I8dBm 11,5 mA I10dBm 12,9 mA Supply Current RF Transmission FSK modulation I5dBm 11,3 mA I8dBm 12,8 mA I10dBm 16,8 mA Supply Current RF Transmission FSK modulation I5dBm 11,3 mA I8dBm 13,4 mA I10dBm 16,7 mA Supply Current RF Transmission FSK modulation I5dBm 10,9 mA I8dBm 13,1 mA I10dBm 13,9 mA Supply Current RF Transmission FSK modulation I5dBm 11,1 mA I8dBm 13,4 mA I10dBm 15 mA Supply Current RF Transmission FSK modulation I5dBm 12,3 mA I8dBm 11,6 mA I10dBm 16,3 mA Data Sheet 187 f = 315 MHz, VBat = 3 V, T = 25°C SFR DIVIC = 03H f = 434 MHz, VBat = 3 V, T = 25°C SFR DIVIC = 03H f = 868 MHz, VBat = 3 V, T = 25°C SFR DIVIC = 03H f = 915 MHz, VBat = 3 V, T = 25°C SFR DIVIC = 03H f = 315 MHz, VBat = 3 V, T = -40°C SFR DIVIC = 03H f = 434 MHz, VBat = 3 V, T = -40°C SFR DIVIC = 03H f = 868 MHz, VBat = 3 V, T = -40°C SFR DIVIC = 03H f = 915 MHz, VBat = 3 V, T = -40°C SFR DIVIC = 03H f = 315 MHz, VBat = 3 V, T = 125°C SFR DIVIC = 03H f = 434 MHz, VBat = 3 V, T = 125°C SFR DIVIC = 03H f = 868 MHz, VBat = 3 V, T = 125°C SFR DIVIC = 03H Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Reference Table 36 Supply Currents (cont’d) Parameter Symbol Values Min. Typ. Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number ■ 5.34 ■ 5.35 ■ 5.36 Max. Supply Current RF Transmission FSK modulation I5dBm 13,3 mA I8dBm 14,8 mA I10dBm 16,7 mA Supply Current POWER DOWN IPD 590 nA VBat = 3.0V, T = 25°C 10,8 μA VBat = 3.0V, T = 125°C Supply Current IDLE IIDLE 0,80 mA VBat = 3.0V, T = 25°C Supply Current RUN 3.1.3.4 f = 915 MHz, VBat = 3 V, T = 125°C SFR DIVIC = 03H 5.37 ■ 5.38 5.39 (SFR DIVIC = 00H, system clock = 12 MHz RC Osc.) IRUN 0,93 mA ■ VBat = 3.0V, T = 125°C (SFR DIVIC = 00H, system clock = 12 MHz RC Osc.) 5.40 1,87 mA VBat = 3.0V, T = 25°C (SFR DIVIC = 00H, system clock = 12 MHz RC Osc.) 5.41 2,0 mA ■ VBat = 3.0V, T = 125°C (SFR DIVIC = 00H, system clock = 12 MHz RC Osc.) 5.42 RF-Transmitter The RF Transmitter is characterized on the evaluation board with 50 Ohm matching network for specified frequency. The schematic and the element values of the matching network can be found in Figure 89 “Matching network for the power amplifier” on Page 196 and Table 50 “Values of the matching network for the power amplifier” on Page 196. Tolerances of the passive elements not taken into account. Table 37 RF Transmitter Parameter Symbol Values Min. Transmit frequency Data rate Output Power Carrier to spurious ratio (incl. harmonics) @D1=315/915MHz Data Sheet fTX Typ. Note / Test Condition Test Number Max. 300 320 MHz 433 450 MHz 865 870 MHz ■ 6.3 902 928 MHz ■ 6.4 32 kBps T=-40°C - 85°C (64 kChips/s) ■ 6.5 20 kBps T=-40°C - 125°C (40 kChips/s) ■ 6.6 5 dBm T=25°C, VBAT=3V 6.7 8 dBm T=25°C, VBAT=3V 6.8 10 dBm T=25°C, VBAT=3V 6.9 dBc FCC 15.231a/b/e 2nd to 10th harmonic RBW = 100kHz DRRF OPRF Unit -28 188 ■ 6.1 6.2 ■ 6.10 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Reference Table 37 RF Transmitter (cont’d) Parameter Symbol Values Min. Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number -20 dBc FCC 15.231a/b/e RBW = 100kHz measured at frequency edge: 0,25%*fC for 315MHz 0,5%*fC for 915MHz fC:carrier frequency ■ 6.11 -95 -89 dBc/Hz RBW = 100kHz, +25°C @ 10kHz offset, ■ 6.12 -93 -87 dBc/Hz @ 100kHz offset, ■ 6.13 -120 -114 dBc/Hz @ 1MHz offset, ■ 6.14 -136 -130 dBc/Hz @ 10MHz offset ■ 6.15 -93 -87 dBc/Hz RBW = 100kHz, +25°C @ 10kHz offset, ■ 6.16 -90 -84 dBc/Hz @ 100kHz offset, ■ 6.17 -113 -107 dBc/Hz @ 1MHz offset, ■ 6.18 -132 -126 dBc/Hz @ 10MHz offset ■ 6.19 -87 -81 dBc/Hz RBW = 100kHz, +25°C @ 10kHz offset, ■ 6.20 -85 -79 dBc/Hz @ 100kHz offset, ■ 6.21 -110 -104 dBc/Hz @ 1MHz offset, ■ 6.22 -134 -128 dBc/Hz @ 10MHz offset ■ 6.23 -86 -80 dBc/Hz RBW = 100kHz, +25°C @ 10kHz offset, ■ 6.24 -85 -79 dBc/Hz @ 100kHz offset, ■ 6.25 -109 -103 dBc/Hz @ 1MHz offset, ■ 6.26 -135 -129 dBc/Hz @ 10MHz offset ■ 6.27 Typ. Carrier to noise ratio @D1=315/915MHz SSB Phase Noise @D1=315MHz SSB Phase Noise @D1=434MHz SSB Phase Noise @D1=868MHz SSB Phase Noise @D1=915MHz 3.1.3.5 Max. LF Receiver The LF Receiver is only available on PMA5110. Table 38 LF Receiver, VBat = 2.1-3.6V Parameter Symbo l Min. Typ. LF Baseband Sensitivity SLF1 2.5 Data rate DRLF 2 Data rate error DRerror -2 Carrier frequency fCLF 120 Data Sheet Values 125 Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number mVpp After calling a Library function for ■ calibration. T=25°C, VBat=3V 7.1 4 kbit/s ■ 7.2 2 % ■ 7.3 130 kHz ■ 7.4 Max. 189 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Reference Table 38 LF Receiver, VBat = 2.1-3.6V (cont’d) Parameter LF Current consumption Symbo l Min. Values Unit Note / Test Condition Typ. ILF_AFE ILF_BB Test Number 1 μA 25°C; 3 V Analog frontend only 440 μA 25°C; 3 V Including baseband ■ 7.6 dB LF Baseband Sensitivity, AGC enabled ■ 7.7 @125 kHz ■ 7.8 Max. 7.5 Input dynamic range DRLF Differential input capacitance CinLF 15 pF Differential input resistance RinLF 500 kOhm AGC disabled ■ 7.9 Preamble length Tpreamble 2 ms Included in reference datagram ■ 7.10 s Worst case @ 125°C ■ 7.11 Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number ms IFX Testboard with these Crystals1) 2) 3) 4) Progammable in 250μs steps SFR XTCFG Carrier Detector TCDCH Freeze Hold Time 70 2 3.1.3.6 Crystal oscillator Table 39 Crystal oscillator Parameter Symbol Values Min. Crystal startup time tXTAL Typ. Max. 1.2 Crystal oscillator startup delay time tXTALADJ 0 1750 μs Crystal frequency fXTAL 18 20 MHz Parasitic capacitance CPCBmax 4 pF 60 Ohm Serial resistance of RRmax the crystal Input inductance XTALOUT LOSC 2.2 uH Crystal fine tuning capacitance Ctune 40 pF 1) 2) 3) 4) 8.1 ■ 8.2 8.3 Determined by PCB Layout ■ 8.4 8.5 Selectable with 156 fF resolution (8 bits) ■ 8.6 ■ 8.7 NX5032SA EXS00A-CS00269 CL = 12pF, fCrystal = 19,6875 MHz NX5032SA EXS00A-CS00270 CL = 12pF, fCrystal = 19,0625 MHz NX5032SA EXS00A-CS00271 CL = 12pF, fCrystal = 18,089583 MHz NX5032SA EXS00A-CS00272 CL = 12pF, fCrystal = 18,080 MHz Data Sheet 190 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Reference 3.1.3.6.1 Crystal oscillator recommendation As crystal oscillator for PMA51xx NX5032SD Table 40 NDK crystal oscillator recommendation for PMA51xx Nominal Frequency (MHz) NDK specification number Shunt capacitance (C0) Motional capacitance (C1) 19.6875 EXS00A-02825 1.58pF±15% 6.73fF±15% 19.0625 EXS00A-03550 1.64pF±15% 6.97fF±15% 18.089583 EXS00A-03551 1.55pF±15% 6.50fF±15% 18.080 EXS00A-03552 1.60pF±15% 6.70fF±15% Data Sheet 191 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Reference 3.1.3.7 12 MHz RC HF oscillator Table 41 12 MHz RC HF oscillator Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number VBat = 3.0V, T = 25°C 9.1 Min. Typ. Max. Operating frequency fRCHF -3% 12.00 +3% MHz Overall drift -5 +5 % dfRCHF 3.1.3.8 2 kHz RC LP oscillator Table 42 2 kHz RC LP oscillator Parameter Symbol Values 9.2 Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number Min. Typ. Max. Operating frequency fRCLP 1.3 2 2.8 kHz VBat = 3.0V, T = 25°C 10.1 Overall drift -7 +7 % Referring to nominal condition 10.2 Data Sheet dfRCLP 192 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Reference 3.1.3.9 Interval Timer Table 43 Interval Timer Parameter Symbol Values Min. Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number ■ 11.1 ■ 11.2 ■ 11.3 Typ. Max. Wake-up interval timer range TWU 0.05 255 s Wake-up interval timer step TWUST 0.05 1 s Frequency calibration error fITCE -5 +5 % 3.1.3.10 Power On Reset Table 44 Power On Reset Parameter Symbol Values Adjustable with resolution of 8 bit. Calibrated with Library Function. TWUST = 0.5s, systemclock = XTAL Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number Min. Typ. Max. Power On Reset level VPOR 0.2 Power On release level VTHR Power On reset time tPOR 1.7 V Minimum supply voltage level measured at Pin VREG for a valid logic LOW at Power On Reset circuit 12.1 1.7 1.8 V Measured at Pin VREG 12.2 0.25 1 10 ms Brown Out detect level in VBRD RUN state 1.7 1.8 V Measured at Pin VREG 12.4 Brown Out detect level in VPDBR POWER DOWN 0.7 1.7 V Measured at Pin VREG 12.5 0.4 12.3 Mode selection time tMODE 2.5 ms ■ 12.6 Minimum detectable Brown Out glitch in RUN state tbrd 1 μs ■ 12.7 Minimum detectable Brown Out glitch in POWER DOWN tbrdpd 100 μs ■ 12.8 Data Sheet 193 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Reference 3.1.3.11 VMIN Detector Table 45 VMIN Detector Parameter Symbol Low battery threshold warning level THLBat Values Min. Typ. Max. 2.0 2.1 3.1.3.12 6k FLASH Code memory data Table 46 6k FLASH Code memory data Parameter Symbol Unit Note / Test Condition Values 2.2 Test Number V Unit 14.1 Note / Test Condition Test Number Min. Typ. Max. Temperature range TRFL Erase/program 0 Erase/Program Supply voltage range regulated VFLBat Endurance Data Retention EnFLCode 85 °C 15.1 2.1 V 15.2 1000 cycles One cycle: Programming of all wordlines and erasing each yrs sector once. yrs tRCode@125 °C 2 tRCode@85 °C 40 ■ 15.3 ■ 15.4 ■ 15.5 Erase time 102 ms RC HF oscillator @12 MHz 15.6 Write time/line 2.2 ms RC HF oscillator @12 MHz Line = 32 byte 15.7 3.1.3.13 2 times 128 byte FLASH Data memory Table 47 2 times 128 byte FLASH Data memory Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number Min. Typ. Max. Temperature range TRFL Erase/program -40 Erase/Program Supply voltage range regulated 2.1 Data Sheet VFLBat 85 °C 16.1 V 16.2 194 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Reference Table 47 2 times 128 byte FLASH Data memory (cont’d) Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number Min. Typ. Max. Endurance ERData 100 Data Retention tRData@85 °C 40 tRData@125 °C 2 1000 kcycles Over lifetime Retention is a function of yrs endurance. yrs ■ 16.3 ■ 16.4 ■ 16.5 Erase time 102 ms RC HF oscillator @12 MHz 16.6 Write time/line 2.2 ms RC HF oscillator @12 MHz Line = 32byte 16.7 3.1.3.14 ADC Interface The ADC Interface is only available on PMA5110. Table 48 ADC Interface Parameter Symbol Values Min. ADC input voltage range VRADC GND ADC resolution RADC 10 Offset correction range ROFFC Differential non-linearity DNL Integral non-linearity INL 3.1.3.15 Digital I/O Pin Table 49 Digital I/O Pin Parameter Input high voltage VIH Output low voltage VOL Output high voltage VOH Test Number Max. VReg 17.1 ■ 17.2 6 bit ■ 17.3 -1.0 1.0 lsb 17.4 -1.5 1.5 lsb 17.5 Values Min. VIL Note / Test Condition bit Symbol Input low voltage Typ. Unit Typ. Unit Note / Test Condition Test Number Max. 0.5 VBat -0.5 0.5 VBat -0.5 V ■ 18.1 V ■ 18.2 V IOL = 1.6mA 18.3 V IOH = -1.6mA 18.4 Output transition time tTHL, tTLH 30 ns 20pF load, 10% ... 90% ■ 18.5 Input capacitance Cpad 2 pF ■ 18.6 Internal pull-up or pull-down resistor RuPPx, RdownPPx1) 50 kOhm 18.7 Internal pull-up or pull-down resistor RupPPy, RdownPPy2) 250 kOhm 18.8 1) PPx are: PP0, PP1 2) PPy are: PP2, PP3, PP4, PP5, PP6, PP7, PP8, PP9 Data Sheet 195 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Reference 3.1.4 Matching Network for the Power Amplifier Figure 89 and Table 50 show the schematic and the element values of the matching network used for the characterization of the RF Transmitter. 3V C1 L1 50Ohms PA C3 L2 C4 C2 Figure 89 Matching network for the power amplifier Table 50 Values of the matching network for the power amplifier Frequency [MHz] Output Power [dBm] C1 [pF] C2 [pF] C3 [pF] C4 [pF] L1 [nH] L2 [nH] 315 434 868 915 Data Sheet 5 100 5,6 12 22 72 72 8 100 5,6 12 15 72 72 10 100 4,7 22 8,2 82 72 5 100 4,7 56 18 36 33 8 100 4,7 39 12 36 36 10 100 5,6 27 12 36 33 5 100 1,8 27 8,2 10 10 8 100 1,8 33 6,8 10 10 10 100 2,2 56 5,6 9,5 9,5 5 100 1,8 33 8,2 9,5 9,5 8 100 2,2 27 6,8 9,5 9,5 10 100 1,8 18 5,6 9,5 9,5 196 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Register Overview 4 Register Overview Table 51 Register Overview Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Page Number ACC Accumulator E0H 65 ADCC0 ADC Configuration Register 0 DBH 116 ADCC1 ADC Configuration Register 1 DCH 118 ADCDH ADC Result Register high byte D5H 119 ADCDL ADC Result Register low byte D4H 119 ADCM ADC Mode Register D2H 120 ADCOFF ADC Input Offset c-network configuration DAH 121 ADCS ADC Status Register D3H 122 B Register B F0H 65 CFG0 Configuration Register 0 F8H 46 CFG1 Configuration Register 1 E8H 47 CFG2 Configuration Register 2 D8H 48 CRC0 CRC Shift Register low byte ACH 126 CRC1 CRC Shift Register high byte ADH 127 CRCC CRC Control Register A9H 125 CRCD CRC Data Register AAH 126 DIVIC Internal Clock Divider B9H 54 DPH Data Pointer (high byte) 83H 65 DPL Data Pointer (low byte) 82H 65 DSR Diagnosis and Status Register D9H 49 ExtWUF External Wake-up Flag Register F1H 37 ExtWUM External Wake-up Mask Register F2H 38 FCSP FLASH Control Register - Sector Protection Control E9H 59 I2CB I2C Baud rate Register B1H 160 I2CC I2C Control Register A2H 161 I2CD I2C Data Register 9AH 162 I2CM I2C Mode Register A3H 162 I2CS I2C Status Register 9BH 163 IE Interrupt Enable Register A8H 69 IP Interrupt Priority Register B8H 70 IRQFR Interrupt Request Flag Register for extended interrupts 8FH 71 ITPH Interval Timer Precounter Register High Byte BBH 43 ITPL Interval Timer Precounter Register Low Byte BAH 44 ITPR Interval Timer Period Register BCH 44 Data Sheet 197 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Register Overview Table 51 Register Overview (cont’d) Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Page Number LBD Low Battery Detector Control EFH 50 LFCDFlt LF Carrier Detect Filtering B2H 94 LFCDM LF Carrier Detector Mode B5H 95 LFDIV0 LF Division Factor low byte B3H 96 LFDIV1 LF Division Factor high byte B4H 96 LFOOT LF On/Off Timer Configuration Register C6H 97 LFOOTP LF On/Off Timer Precounter C5H 98 LFP0H LF Pattern 0 Detector Sequence Data MSB BFH 98 LFP0L LF Pattern 0 Detector Sequence Data LSB BEH 99 LFP1H LF Pattern 1 Detector Sequence Data MSB CFH 99 LFP1L LF Pattern 1 Detector Sequence Data LSB CEH 100 LFPCFG LF Pattern Detection Configuration Register C7H 100 LFRX0 LF Receiver Configuration Register 0 B7H 101 LFRX1 LF Receiver Configuration Register 1 B6H 102 LFRXC LF Receiver Control Register F9H 103 LFRXD LF Receiver Data Register A5H 104 LFRXS LF Receiver Status Register A4H 105 LFSYN0 LF Sync Pattern 0 A6H 106 LFSYN1 LF Sync Pattern 1 A7H 106 LFSYNCFG LF SYNC Matching Configuration Register AFH 107 MMR0 Memory Mapped Register 0 84H 60 MMR1 Memory Mapped Register 1 85H 60 MMR2 Memory Mapped Register 2 86H 60 P1Dir IO-Port 1 Direction Register 91H 150 P1In IO-Port 1 Data IN Register 92H 152 P1Out IO-Port 1 Data OUT Register 90H 153 P1SENS IO-Port 1 Sensitivity Register 93H 154 P3Dir IO-Port 3 Direction Register EBH 151 P3In IO-Port 3 Data IN Register ECH 152 P3Out IO-Port 3 Data OUT Register B0H 153 P3SENS IO-Port 3 Sensitivity Register EDH 155 PSW Program Status Word D0H 66 REF Resume Event Flag Register D1H 39 RFC RF Transmitter Control Register EEH 77 RFD RF Encoder TX Data Register 8EH 77 RFENC RF Encoder Tx Control Register E7H 78 RFFSLD RF Frequency Synthesizer Lock Detector Configuration DFH 79 RFFSPLL RF Frequency Synthesizer PLL Configuration D7H 80 Data Sheet 198 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Register Overview Table 51 Register Overview (cont’d) Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Page Number RFS RF Encoder Tx Status Register E6H 81 RFTX RF Transmitter Configuration Register AEH 82 RFVCO RF Frequency Synthesizer VCO Configuration DEH 83 RNGD Random Number Generator Data Register ABH 128 SP Stack Pointer 81H 65 SPIB SPI Baud rate Register F3H 171 SPIC SPI Control Register F4H 172 SPID SPI Data Register F5H 173 SPIM SPI Mode Register F6H 173 SPIS SPI Status Register F7H 175 TCON Timer Control Register Timer 0/1 88H 132 TCON2 Timer Control Register Timer 2/3 C8H 143 TH0 Timer 0 Register high byte 8CH 133 TH1 Timer 1 Register high byte 8DH 133 TH2 Timer 2 Register high byte CDH 144 TH3 Timer 3 Register high byte CBH 144 TL0 Timer 0 Register low byte 8AH 134 TL1 Timer 1 Register low byte 8BH 134 TL2 Timer 2 Register low byte CCH 145 TL3 Timer 3 Register low byte CAH 145 TMOD Timer Mode Register 89H 135 TMOD2 Timer Mode Register 2 Timer 2/3 C9H 146 WUF Wake-up Flag Register C0H 40 WUM Wake-up Mask Register C1H 41 XTCFG XTAL Configuration Register C2H 56 XTAL1 XTAL Frequency Register FSKHIGH/ASK C3H 55 XTAL0 XTAL Frequency Register FSKLOW C4H 55 Data Sheet 199 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx References References This section contains documents used for cross- reference throughout this document. [1] PMA Function Library Guide Data Sheet 200 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 PMA51xx Package Outlines 5 Package Outlines Dimensions are defined in millimeter. Figure 90 Data Sheet Package Outline PG-TSSOP-38 201 Revision 2.1, 2010-06-02 www.infineon.com Published by Infineon Technologies AG